2018
DURANGO
USER
GUIDE
INCLUDES SRT
Whether it’s providing information about specific
product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your
Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your
make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers
tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this
information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review
and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular
Topics” area of the www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the
instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of
your vehicle.
©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
18WD-926-AA
DURANGO
SIXTH EDITION
USER GUIDE
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY
OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, MEDIA AND WARRANTY
BOOKLET BY VISITING:
WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNERS-MANUAL.HTML
(U.S. RESIDENTS);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
(CANADIAN RESIDENTS).
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Dodge
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions. However, it
is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may
apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help
personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
DRIVING AND
ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most
frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a
collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the
safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in a collision and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as
cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle. Some
states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents pre-
cision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALW AYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. Y ou have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
This guide illustrates and describes the opera-
tion of features and equipment that are either
standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide
may also include a description of features and
equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this guide
that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US
LLC reserves the right to make changes in de-
sign and specifications and/or make additions
to or improvements to its products without im-
posing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you
quickly become acquainted with the important
features of your vehicle. It contains most things
you will need to operate and maintain the ve-
hicle, including emergency information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S
MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a refer-
ence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features and
processes of your vehicle. It contains most
things you will need to operate and maintain the
vehicle, including emergency information and
procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your ve-
hicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as infor-
mation covering features and processes not cov-
ered in this User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s
Manual can be accessed for free online in a
printer -friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By convert-
ing from paper to electronic delivery for the
majority of the user information for your vehicle,
together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-
based products and lessen the stress on our
environment.
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding an
occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not
complying with this rule will be properly speci-
fied in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that some
details of the image do not correspond to the
actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived
considering vehicles with the steering wheel on
the left side; it is therefore possible that in
vehicles with the steering wheel on the right
side, the position or construction of some con-
trols is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the
figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end of
this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the rel-
evant symbols in the tabs. There is always a
textual indication of the current chapter at the
side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be ob-
served when using this component. Refer to
“W arning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor -
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a
higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable
of performing better in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all ve-
hicles can go out of control. Because of the higher
center of gravity , if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,
or other unsafe driving actions that can cause
loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover
of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal
injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that
the universal use of existing seat belts could cut
the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent
incorrect use of components which could cause
accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed
to prevent against procedures that could result
in damage to your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
3
4
6
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 6 — Ignition
2 — Paddle Shifters 7 — Climate Controls
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 8 — Uconnect System
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Switch Panel
5 — Speed Controls 10 — Glove Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
INTERIOR
Instrument Panel
1 — Door Locks 4 — Seats
2 — Window Switches 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Door Handles 6 — USB/AUX Media Hub
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .....13
KEYS .......................14
KeyFob.....................14
IGNITION SWITCH.................16
Keyless Push Button Ignition .........16
Dead Key Fob Battery .............16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........16
To Enter Remote Start Mode .........16
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The V ehicle ...................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
V ehicle......................17
General Information ..............17
SENTRY KEY....................18
Customer Key Programming .........18
Replacement Keys ...............18
General Information ..............19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED. . .19
To Arm The System ..............19
To Disarm The System .............20
DOORS ......................20
Keyless Enter -N-Go — Passive Entry.....20
SEATS.......................24
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped .....24
Heated Seats ..................26
Front V entilated Seats .............28
60/40 Split Rear Seat .............29
Rear Captain's Chairs .............29
Folding Third Row ...............30
HEAD RESTRAINTS ................30
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats ...................31
Head Restraints — Rear Seats ........32
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats . . .33
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints. .33
STEERING WHEEL .................34
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ...................34
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .34
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . .35
MIRRORS .....................35
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........35
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................35
Headlight Switch ................35
Multifunction Lever ..............36
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped. . .36
High/Low Beam Switch ............36
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ....37
Automatic Headlights .............37
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . .37
Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........37
Turn Signals...................38
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped .....38
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......38
Windshield W iper Operation..........38
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .....39
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..........40
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...............41
Automatic Climate Control Overview .....41
Climate Control Functions...........49
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ....................50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11
Operating Tips .................51
WINDOWS ....................52
Power Windows .................52
Wind Buffeting .................54
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......54
Opening Sunroof ................55
Closing Sunroof.................55
Pinch Protect Feature .............55
V enting Sunroof — Express ..........56
HOOD .......................56
Opening The Hood ...............56
Closing The Hood................56
LIFTGATE .....................57
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ........57
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK) ....................58
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink ....................58
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels .....59
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code
Or Non-Rolling Code Device..........59
Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door
Opener......................59
Programming HomeLink To A Miscellaneous
Device ......................60
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button ......................61
General Information ..............61
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..............61
Electrical Power Outlets ............61
Power Inverter — If Equipped ........64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF
EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NA V touchscreen sys-
tem — If Equipped.
To access the V ehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
NOTE:
V ehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display: Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
• Your User Guide —
Updated in
real-time
• Available when and
where you need it
• Touchscreen
convenience
• Customizable inter-
face
• Maintenance
schedules and
information
•
Multilingual
• Comprehensive
icon & symbol
glossary
Once you launch your V ehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the Ve-
hicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to con-
nect and no external device needed for play-
back. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in
real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites
category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• W arranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
• Operating Instruc-
tions
• Maintenance
Schedules
• Warranty Informa-
tion
• Emergency
Procedures
• Fluid Level
Standards
• 911 Contact and
More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to
add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the
future.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon
13
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with Re-
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a STAR T/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote Key-
less Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter -N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
opposite of the Emergency Key) against the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button and push to op-
erate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Key Fob
1 — Liftgate 4 — Remote Start
2 — Unlock 5 — Panic
3 — Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm
will arm. To change the current setting, refer to
"Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and liftgate.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the ve-
hicle electronics can be used to start and oper-
ate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed
to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any
other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the ve-
hicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter -
N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
15
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button, as long as the
key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three
operating modes which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three modes
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
opposite of the Emergency Key) against the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button and push to op-
erate the ignition switch.
Dead Key Fob Battery
Key Not Detected Feature
If the ignition position does not change with a
push of the ignition button, and the instrument
cluster display message “Key Fob Not De-
tected” is being displayed, the key fob may have
a low or dead battery . In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the keyless push
button ignition. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the
keyless ignition push button and push to oper -
ate the ignition. Once the starter engages and
the engine starts remove the key fob from the
keyless ignition push button.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Low Or Dead Key Fob Battery Starting
Procedure
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
• For security , power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive
times with the key fob. However , the ignition
must be cycled by pushing the ST ART/STOP
button twice (or the ignition switch must be
cycled to the ON/RUN position) before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable with a one time push of the remote
start button for two seconds after receiving a
valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the vehicle security
alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15-minute cycle, push and release the ST AR T/
STOP button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the instrument cluster display until
you push the ignition STAR T button.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
17
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob and a Keyless Push
Button Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only
key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can
be used to start and operate the vehicle. If an
invalid key fob is used to attempt to start and
operate the vehicle, the system will not allow
the engine to crank. If an invalid key fob is used
to start the engine, the system will shut the
engine off in two seconds.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN mode,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the
light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob
to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur ,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the ve-
hicle electronics can be used to start and oper-
ate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed
to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any
other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the ve-
hicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter -
N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
an authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless
Enter -N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized opera-
tion. While the vehicle security alarm is armed,
interior switches for door locks and liftgate re-
lease are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the vehicle security light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF mode. Refer to "Ignition Switch" in
“Getting To Know Your V ehicle” in the Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Pas-
sive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob
available in the same exterior zone (refer
to "Keyless Enter -N-Go — Passive Entry,"
located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know
Your V ehicle" for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock
plunger.
19
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry unlock door handle (if
equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" located in “Doors” in “Getting
To Know Y our V ehicle" for further informa-
tion).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
– For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter -N-Go — Passive Entry, push the
keyless ignition button (requires at least
one valid key fob in the vehicle).
– For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Enter -N-Go — Passive Entry, insert a
valid key into the ignition and turn the key
to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry . Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not un-
lock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle se-
curity alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and
the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter -N-Go — Passive En-
try. This feature allows you to lock and unlock
the vehicle’ s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’ s Manual for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the security alarm.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle passive entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the key
fob's wireless signal and prevent the passive
entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
• Passive Entry activates illuminated approach
for the time set by the customer (0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds), and flashes the turn signal
lights. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
driver's front door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically. The interior door panel lock
knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
driver’s front door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors automatically. The interior door panel lock
knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’ s
door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature, which
will function if the ignition is OFF.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
21
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed, the vehicle
checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for
any valid Passive Entry key fob. If one of the
vehicle's Passive Entry key fob is detected in-
side the vehicle, and no other valid Passive
Entry key fob are detected outside the vehicle,
the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt, ALL doors will lock, and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the
vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate handle. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pull the electronic liftgate handle for a
power open on vehicles equipped with Power
Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and
lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open
with the handle and no key fob is required.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located to the right of electronic
liftgate handle.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when
you push the button on the liftgate. If "Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will unlock when
you push the button on the liftgate. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’ s Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handle, push the door handle lock
button to lock all four doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the door handle lock
button. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’ s
Manual for further information.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the
door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle or door handle button. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle, without the
vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an ef-
fect on the passive entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button lo-
cated on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT Grab Handle When Locking
23
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through
a memory switch. Each memory profile contains
desired position settings for the driver seat, side
mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Y our key fob can also be pro-
grammed to recall the same positions when the
unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and
the other key fob can be linked to memory
position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driv-
er’s door trim panel. The switch consists of three
buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2.
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
Memory Seat Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either
of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instru-
ment cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in P ARK to
recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"
in this section for instructions on how to set
a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster .
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle is not in P ARK, a message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the memory switch, push memory but-
ton (1) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two
using the memory switch, push memory but-
ton (2) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or
by pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
25
When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and
steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat po-
sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-
ing and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the OFF posi-
tion.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the
driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy
Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The
Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later dis-
abled) through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further details.
Heated Seats
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury , medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater . It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are lo-
cated within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat set-
tings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen but-
tons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one
for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn
the HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HI to LO,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately 45
minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further details.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat set-
tings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
• Push the switch
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Push the switch
a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
27
• Push the switch a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat out-
put will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will au-
tomatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of indicator lights
changes from two to one, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury , medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater . It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats,
the seat cushion and seat back will have fans
that draw the air from the passenger compart-
ment and move air through fine perforations in
the seat cover to help keep the driver and front
passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera-
tures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and
LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to
choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second
time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner's Manual
for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
60/40 Split Rear Seat
The left or right side of the second row seatback
can be folded flat to carry cargo. The left and
right side of the second row seat can also be
tumbled forward to allow access to the third row
seat.
Fold And Tumble
Pull upward on the release lever to release the
seat.
NOTE:
Also, pulling upward on this handle allows the
outboard seating positions to be reclined.
Tumble the seat forward using the red pull strap
located behind the seatback.
NOTE:
If sitting in the third row seat, pull rearward on
the tumble pull strap located at the rear of the
seat and tumble the seat forward.
Rear Captain's Chairs
Fold And Tumble
The left or right side of the second row seatback
can be folded flat to carry cargo. When the lower
storage compartment is accessed using the rear
push button it allows the armrest to flip forward
for “fold flat mode.”
Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be
lowered below fold flat seat plane and protect
the armrest vinyl from damage when using the
vehicle to haul cargo.
Seat Release Lever
Tumble Pull Strap
Rear Captain's Chairs
29
The left and right side of the second row seat
can also be tumbled forward to allow access to
the third row seat. Pull upward on the release
lever to release the seat. Pulling upward on this
handle allows the outboard seating positions to
be reclined.
Tumble the seat forward using the red pull strap
located behind the seatback.
NOTE:
If sitting in the third row seat, pull rearward on
the tumble pull strap located at the rear of the
seat and tumble the seat forward.
If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console
there is a stepping pad to allow passengers to
easily access the third row seats.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to
increase the cargo area. To lower either seat,
pull on the release handle located on back of
the seat and lower the seat using the pull strap
located next to the release handle.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full
upright position or tumbled when folding the
third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using
the strap located on the back of the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver , should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Stepping Pad Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
WARNING!
• Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head re-
straint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will
be split in two halves, with the front half being
soft foam and trim, the back half being decora-
tive plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints” in “Safety” in the Owner’ s
Manual for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of
the head restraint, and push downward on the
head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head re-
straint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
31
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Safety” in the Owner’ s Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver , should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acciden-
tal deployment of the Active Head Re-
straint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is de-
ployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward
when the rear seat is folded to a load floor
position, but do not return to their normal posi-
tion when the rear seat is raised. After returning
either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard
head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjust-
ment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raise
it or push downward on the head restraint to
lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether , refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” in your Own-
er’s Manual at for further information.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go by pulling upward. Then, push the re-
lease button at the base of the post while pulling
the head restraint upward. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in
its lowered position could result in seri-
ous injury or death in a collision. Always
make sure the outboard head restraints
are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether , refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further
information.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head re-
WARNING!
straints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third
row head restraints can be folded using the
Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bot-
tom of the Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button
to power
fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded down-
ward using the Headrest Fold button. The
head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
33
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
— If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering col-
umn upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steer-
ing wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel out-
ward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever up-
ward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering col-
umn upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is
located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or
down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the lever toward you or
push the lever away from you as desired.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
Handle
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control
Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
WARNING!
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather . The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has
been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time will vary based on environ-
mental temperatures. The heated steering
wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when
the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. Y ou can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come
on during a remote start through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or steering wheel covers of any
type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt
frost or ice. This feature can be
activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster . Refer to “Cli-
mate Controls” in this chapter for further infor-
mation.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the opera-
tion of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if
equipped).
35
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the head-
light switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are
lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch
resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash
with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materi-
als to clean the lenses.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever
the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the P ARK position. The lights will remain
on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or
ACC position or the parking brake is engaged.
The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’ s Manual
for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instru-
ment panel to switch the headlights to high
beams. Pulling the multifunction back toward
the steering wheel will turn the low beams back
on, or shut the high beams off.
Headlight Switch
1 — Auto
2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Push Fog Lights
4 — Rotate Dimmer
Multifunction Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror . This camera detects ve-
hicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the ap-
proaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect settings, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper perfor -
mance. See your local authorized dealer.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay fea-
ture is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/
90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this customer -
programmable feature. When your headlights
are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is program-
mable through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or head-
light position and pushing in the headlight ro-
tary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate when
the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off posi-
tion, or the high beam is selected.
37
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument clus-
ter will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a
turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running
Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in
which the turn signal is flashing. The Daytime
Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn
signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-
cated on the multifunction lever on the left side
of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever . For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/
W asher” in this section.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the
fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth
detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the wind-
shield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 18 seconds be-
tween cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one
second (fourth detent).
Multifunction Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer , push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold while spray
is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the inter-
mittent interval previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will re-
sume normal operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. Y ou might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid
WARNING!
sudden icing of the windshield during freez-
ing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind-
shield and automatically activates the wipers for
the driver . The feature is especially useful for
road splash or overspray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever . Wiper delay posi-
tion one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position four is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity . Setting four can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place
the wiper switch in the OFF position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or high-
speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is pres-
ent on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
39
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owners Manual for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-
tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will not
operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater
than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-
mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sens-
ing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (men-
tioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is oper-
ated by rotating a switch, located at the middle
of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Upon release of the switch, the wipers will
resume the continuous rear wiper operation.
When this rotary control is in the OFF position,
rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as
long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released it will return to the OFF position and
the wipers will cycle several times before return-
ing to the parked position.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will re-
sume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return
to the “park” position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regu-
late the temperature, air flow, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The con-
trols are located on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Temperature Controls
Temperature Hard Button Controls
41
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX
A/C
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recircula-
tion mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section
for more information.
FRONT
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may in-
crease. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the cli-
mate system will return to previous setting.
REAR
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns
OFF after ten minutes.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
Icon Description
REAR CLIMATE
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls
are ON.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the Up button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or the Down button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings. On the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings or towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will
move up or down with the driver’s temperature, when it is adjusted.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this fea-
ture is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The Sync
feature also synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger tempera-
ture setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds avail-
able. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
43
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor , defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions
that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind-
shield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front
ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the "REAR CLIMATE" button on the
touchscreen to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) appears. Control
functions now operate rear system.
• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" button on
the touchscreen.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Controls
Select the desired air distribution mode from the selectable modes on the touchscreen. The rear airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the headliner outlets, and floor outlets.
Headliner Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner . Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side shuts off the airflow.
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4 With 7–inch
Display Rear Controls
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display Rear Controls
45
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
75
HI
Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear seat occupants.
Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release to return to the Front Climate Control Screen.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The Sync feature also
synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
Icon Description
Rear Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the
rear right side of the 3rd Row seats and over-
head outlets at each outboard rear seating posi-
tion. The system provides heated air through the
floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through
the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located on the headliner on the passenger side
of the vehicle.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
Select the desired air distribution mode using the Mode Control Knob. The rear airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the headliner outlets, and floor outlets.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
47
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner . Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it to the right to raise the tempera-
ture, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. When rear controls
are locked by the front system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and any rear overhead ad-
justments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control Knob in the rear of the
vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Tem-
perature Control System through an intake
grille, located in floor under the passengers’
seats. Do not block or place objects directly
in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets.
The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on
the Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock
symbol in the rear display . The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front
Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the
rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature
Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner , near
the center of the vehicle.
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on
the Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the
Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear tem-
perature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower , Rear Temperature
and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your
comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower
knob counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the sys-
tem to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condition-
ing system is turned on, cool dehumidified air
will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy , press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually ad-
just the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower
speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radia-
tor), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
49
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Press-
ing other settings will cause the MAX A/C opera-
tion to switch to the selected setting and MAX
A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
recirculation control button. The recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn
off the recirculation mode and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC
Panel and the word “AUTO” will illuminate
in the front ATC display, along with two
temperatures for the driver and front passen-
ger. The system will then automatically regu-
late the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver ,
passenger, and rear temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the set-
tings. You will experience the greatest effi-
ciency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to pro-
vide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if
the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the
front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield.
DEFROST mode must be manually selected to
clear the windshield and side glass.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to
off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the
blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat
occupants to control the volume of air circu-
lated in the rear of the vehicle. Turn the control
knob to increase or decrease the fan speed.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Tem-
perature Control System through an intake
grille, located in the right side trim panel
behind the third row seats. The heater outlets
are located in the right side trim panel, just
behind the sliding door . Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower mo-
tor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push the temperature buttons. The rear
temperature settings are displayed in the rear
ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front sys-
tem, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the
ATC panel is illuminated and any rear overhead
adjustments are ignored.
When the Sync feature is active, the rear tem-
perature is synchronized to the driver’ s tempera-
ture setting. If the rear temperature is changed,
the Sync feature will deactivate.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50%
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032 and 50% water is recom-
mended. Refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper coolant
selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the Air Recirculation mode during winter
months is not recommended because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be
quickly removed by turning the mode selector to
Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to
maintain a clear windshield and provide suffi-
cient heating. If side window fogging becomes
objectionable, increase blower speed to improve
airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle
windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
51
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will
automatically adjust the climate control set-
tings to reduce or eliminate window fogging
on the front windshield. When this occurs,
recirculation will be unavailable.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window . Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the inte-
rior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air in-
take may reduce airflow , and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air
containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong
odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” in your Owner’ s Manual for filter re-
placement instructions.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel. There is a single switch
on the front passenger door and rear passenger
doors which operate the front and rear passen-
ger door windows. The window controls will
operate only when the keyless push button igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
The power window switches remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will
cancel this feature.
Power Window Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power win-
dows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter -N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, par-
ticularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To can-
cel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To open the window part way, push the switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
— Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the sec-
ond detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto-Up, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window . Any
impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
Auto-Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly
to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
Auto-Down Window Switches
53
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the win-
dow completely and continue to hold the
switch up for an additional two seconds after
the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch down
for an additional two seconds after the win-
dow is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable
the window controls, push and release the win-
dow lockout button (the indicator light on the
button with turn on). To enable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button again (the indicator light on the button
will turn back off).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in
the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped)
in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Window Lockout Button
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — V enting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
54
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked ve-
hicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter -N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, par -
ticularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while op-
erating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sun-
roof. Y ou could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop when the full open
position is reached. This is called “Express Open.”
During Express Open operation, any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will move rearward and
automatically stop at full open position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof
switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-
half second and the sunroof will close automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close.” During Express Close operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
forward. The sunroof will move forward and
automatically stop at full closed position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement
and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed
again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-
cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re-
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
55
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express V ent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position. Dur-
ing Express Vent operation, any other actuation
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the in-
strument panel and in front of the driver's
door.
2. Reach under the hood from outside the ve-
hicle, move the safety latch to the left and
lift the hood.
Closing The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to fol-
low this warning could result in serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Release
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
56
LIFTGATE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter -N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle”) or by pushing the
liftgate button on the key fob. Push the liftgate
button on the key fob twice within five seconds
to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
open, pushing the button twice within five sec-
onds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the
front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the
liftgate button located on left rear trim panel,
near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on
left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if
"Flash Lamps with Lock" is enabled in the
Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will
be audible. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’ s Manual for further
information.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release
can be used to open the liftgate. The emer-
gency liftgate latch release can be accessed
through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if
the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is
above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in tempera-
tures below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures
above 150° F (65° C). Be sure to remove any
buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before
pushing any of the power liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it
is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice to operate
the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate
will reverse to the full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate
motor will disengage to allow manual opera-
tion.
57
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple ob-
structions within the same cycle, the system
will automatically stop and the liftgate must
be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HOMELINK)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as ga-
rage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or
home security systems. The HomeLink unit is
powered by your vehicles 12 V olt battery .
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink channels.
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any of
the programmed HomeLink buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are pro-
grammed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink button.
• The HomeLink indicator light is located above
the center button.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
For efficient programming and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal, it is rec-
ommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed
to activate the device you are trying to program
your HomeLink button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the chan-
nels of your HomeLink before you use it for the
first time.
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
58
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or , on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or non-
rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typi-
cally, devices manufactured after 1995 have
rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will
also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button lo-
cated where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the
button you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door
Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor , follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional but-
tons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you
are trying to replicate.
59
4.
Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. The HomeLink indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor . Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-
grammed HomeLink button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor oper-
ates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for
the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink
button and observe the HomeLink indicator
light. If the HomeLink indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the uni-
versal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
WARNING!
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause
you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener” for the procedure on how to pro-
gram HomeLink to a miscellaneous device, as it
follows the same procedure. Be sure to deter-
mine if the device has a rolling code, or non-
rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner . The procedure
may need to be preformed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink
buttons.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure
to determine whether the new device you want
to program the HomeLink button to has a Roll-
ing Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remain-
ing steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and Eco-
nomic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low pow-
ered electrical accessories. The power outlets
are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a “bat-
tery” are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 W att (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded
the fuse protecting the system needs to be
replaced.
61
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New V ehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the instru-
ment panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area of
the center console.
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center
console, there is also a power outlet located in
the lower storage area of the rear full center
console.
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the
right rear cargo area.
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the
power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the
fuse panel from fuse location F90 to F91.
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Outlet
Rear Quarter Power Outlet Fuse
1 — F90–F91 Fuse 20A
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
62
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
63
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type
of outlet should be inserted into any
12 V olt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause
an electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge
sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
CAUTION!
• After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not
being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 V olt, 150 W att inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet
can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
150 W atts. Certain high-end video game con-
soles exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 W atts is exceeded, the power inverter au-
tomatically shuts down. Once the electrical de-
vice has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
Power Inverter
1 — USB Ports (Charging Only)
2 — Power Inverter Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
64
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the recep-
tacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause
an electric shock and failure.
65
66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .........68
Location And Controls .............68
Engine Oil Life Reset .............69
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items.......................70
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ....70
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ........71
Red W arning Lights ..............71
Yellow W arning Lights .............75
Yellow Indicator Lights.............78
Green Indicator Lights .............78
White Indicator Lights .............80
Blue Indicator Lights..............80
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .81
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ..................81
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
67
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor -
mation to the driver . With the ignition in the
STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Y our
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’ s sys-
tems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the spe-
cific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or submenu
item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. Push and hold the OK button for
one second to reset displayed/selected fea-
tures that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center portion of the cluster and consist of
multiple sections:
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display
will illuminate in grey under normal condi-
tions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for
critical warnings, and white for on demand
information.
• Submenu Dots — Whenever there are sub-
menus available, the position within the sub-
menus is shown here.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
68
• Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
• Gear Selector Status (PRND)
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp,
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel
Economy, Current Fuel Economy)
• All Wheel Drive (A WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally
display the main menu or the screens of a
selected feature of the main menu. The main
display area also displays “pop up” messages
that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up
messages fall into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns
to the previous screen. Most of the messages
of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and
can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. Examples of this message type
are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
“Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or
until the condition that activated the message
is cleared. Examples of this message type are
“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on)
and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Re-
mote Start feature. This message type is dis-
played until the ignition is in the RUN state.
Examples of this message type are “Remote
Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns
to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Re-
quired” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-
uled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluc-
tuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to dis-
play each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message tem-
porarily, push and release the OK or arrow but-
tons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
69
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster dis-
play controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“V ehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and nu-
meric display will update to show 100%. If
conditions are not met a popup message of
"To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run" will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow but-
ton to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys-
tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE STAR T/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys-
tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the desired Selectable Menu item is dis-
played in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as de-
sired.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Current Gear
•On
• Off (default setting)
Gear Display
• Full (default setting)
• Single
Favorite Menus
• Speedometer
• V ehicle Info
• Performance (Show/Hide)
• Driver Assist (Show/Hide)
• Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
70
• Trip (Show/Hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (Show/Hide)
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostic Codes
• Speed W arning (Show/Hide)
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button
to choose whether to show or hide this menu on
the instrument cluster display.
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (R TE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (R TE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Set-
tings)
• Restore
• Cancel
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and pre-
cautionary and as such must not be considered
as exhaustive and/or alternative to the informa-
tion contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active tell-
tales will display first if applicable. The system
check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear .
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’ s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
71
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake func-
tions, including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on it
may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been cor -
rected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve brak-
ing capacity in the event of a failure to a portion
of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of
the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake
W arning Light, which will turn on when the
brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service per-
formed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. Y ou could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
V ehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake W arning Light will
turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two sec-
onds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the bat-
tery is not charging properly. If it stays on while
the engine is running, there may be a malfunc-
tion with the charging system. Contact an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting
And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
73
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warn-
ing Light
This warning light warns of an overheated en-
gine condition. If the engine coolant tempera-
ture is too high, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound. If the tempera-
ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the
engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tempera-
ture reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the lift-
gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer tow-
ing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature W arning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to
boil over , come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
74
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature W arning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
age or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indica-
tor Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be ser -
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref-
erenced above, can reach higher tempera-
tures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or
park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re-
sult in death or serious injury to the driver ,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to
the vehicle control system. It also could af-
fect fuel economy and driveability . If the MIL
is flashing, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur . Immedi-
ate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Elec-
tronic Stability Control system is Active. The
“ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
75
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the
Traction Mode is set to Sport, Track or Full OFF
in Drive Modes.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that
slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your ve-
hicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under -inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under -inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under -inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
76
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’ s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under -inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re-
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-
nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal
(7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
added.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also
on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision W arning System.
Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
77
Refer to "Forward Collision W arning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not oper -
ating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
— Service AWD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (A WD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact
your authorized dealer.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/
Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense W arning Light will be solid yel-
low when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and requires
service. Please see an authorized dealer.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indi-
cator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision W arning is off.
— AWD Low Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the all-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. A WD LOW is designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Refer to “All Wheel Drive Operation” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information on
all-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Green Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
78
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Without Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
target vehicle is not detected. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer
to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been de-
tected and the system is “armed” and ready to
provide visual and torque warnings if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Snow Mode is
active.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
— Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
— Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Tow Mode is active.
— Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track Mode is
active.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn sig-
nal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti-
vated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
79
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) has been turned on, but is not set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom Mode SRT
is active.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is ready, but not set.
— Set SRT Speed Warning Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching the
set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, the
indication will light up yellow and flash along
with a continuous chime. Speed W arning can
be turned on and off in the instrument cluster
display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Y our Instrument Panel” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light illumi-
nates solid white. This occurs when only left,
right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a
single lane line is detected, the system is ready
to provide only visual warnings if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the detected
lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
— Valet Mode SRT Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active.
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur -
ther information.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
80
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control sys-
tems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as en-
gine emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission con-
trol system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur . Immediate
service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Autho-
rized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver -behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, in-
cluding safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an ac-
cident involving serious injury or
death.
• Access, or allow others to access, in-
formation stored in your vehicle sys-
tems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
81
82
SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........84
Blind Spot Monitoring .............84
Forward Collision W arning (FCW) .......86
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....88
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ........92
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....92
Important Safety Precautions ........92
Seat Belt Systems ...............93
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . .102
Child Restraints ...............112
Transporting Pets ...............128
SAFETY TIPS ..................128
Transporting Passengers ...........128
Exhaust Gas .................129
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
V ehicle ....................129
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The V ehicle .............131
SAFETY
83
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar -based sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect Highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/
front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside
mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a
blind spot zone.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the
radio to notify you of objects that have entered
the detection zones.
Rear Detection Zones
Blind Spot Mirror
SAFETY
84
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where the vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the
driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in
REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reducing
the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety” in
the Owner's Manual for more information.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are avail-
able in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner's Manual for further details.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
tected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and au-
dible alerts when a detected object is present.
Whenever an audible alert is requested, the
radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored mode
will be recalled and used.
85
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible and visual warn-
ings within the instrument cluster display to
warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of
a forward collision. When the system deter-
mines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual
warnings.
Changing FCW System Status
The Forward Collision W arning settings are lo-
cated in the Uconnect display in the controls
settings.
NOTE:
• The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Me-
dium” setting and the system status is “W arn-
ing & Braking”. This allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings
and it applies autonomous braking.
• Changing the FCW status to “Only W arning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but main-
tains the audible and visual warnings.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is
not braking adequately in the event of a po-
tential frontal collision. If FCW is set to “Off”,
“FCW OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
SAFETY
86
Changing FCW Sensitivity
The FCW feature has three settings and can be
changed within the Uconnect System Screen:
• Far
• Medium
• Near
Far
The far setting provides warnings for potential
collisions more distant in front of the vehicle,
allowing the driver to have the most reaction
time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Medium
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it ap-
plies autonomous braking.
Near
Changing the FCW sensitivity to the “Near”
setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much
closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic
driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision W arning (FCW) is not in-
tended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via brak-
ing and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
87
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires —
when the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of
14 psi (96 kPa) or lower , always check tire
pressure and replace the tire at the first oppor-
tunity. At inflation pressure of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of
operation. In this condition, it is recommended
a vehicle maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h)
for a maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km).
The manufacturer does not recommend using
the run flat feature while driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature de-
creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer
to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the vehi-
cle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason, in-
cluding low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above recommended cold tire pressure. Once
the low tire pressure warning has been illumi-
nated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for
the TPMS W arning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS W arning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pres-
sure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS W arning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approxi-
mately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS W arn-
ing Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS W arning Light will turn off only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold tire pressure value.
SAFETY
88
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warnings have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir -
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your sen-
sor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide warn-
ing of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under -inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under -inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’ s responsibil-
ity to maintain correct tire pressure using an
accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS W arning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the ac-
tual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings
to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con-
sists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
89
• V arious Tire Pressure Monitoring System Mes-
sages, which display in the instrument clus-
ter, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• TPMS W arning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illu-
minate in the instrument cluster ,
and an audible chime will be acti-
vated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are
low. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic
display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) in a different color . Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in
a different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure dis-
played in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the TPMS Warn-
ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor -
mation.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
SAFETY
90
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System W arning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected.
The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster display will display a “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of
five seconds. This message is then followed by a
graphic display , with “- -“ in place of the pres-
sure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still ex-
ists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to
monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare
tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the
next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will remain
on, a chime will sound, and the instrument
cluster display will still display a pressure value
in the different color graphic display and an
“Inflate to XX” message will be displayed. After
driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addi-
tion, the instrument cluster display will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent igni-
tion switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster display will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS
will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem W arning Light will turn off and the graphic
in the instrument cluster display will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
91
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the instru-
ment cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place
of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
W arning Light will flash on and off for 75 sec-
onds and then turn off. The instrument cluster
will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage and then display pressure values in place
of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no lon-
ger be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on oth-
ers. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer .
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
SAFETY
92
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear -facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) should be secured in the rear seat of
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride prop-
erly buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. Y ou should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9.
If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear -facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
WARNING!
injury to a child 12 years or younger, in-
cluding a child in a rear-facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
93
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the STAR T or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the STAR T or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and re-
main on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning se-
quence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer . FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
SAFETY
94
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However , in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. Y ou can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly . Occupants,
including the driver , should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
•
W earing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
WARNING!
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately
and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
95
WARNING!
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly .
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the in-
side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury . A seat
belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. W ear the seat belt over your shoul-
der so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant
to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Dam-
aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the seat belt sys-
WARNING!
tem. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door . Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the web-
bing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt
to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdo-
men. To remove slack in the lap belt portion,
pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the
lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate
and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoul-
der and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the shoulder belt.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
SAFETY
96
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage but-
ton to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
higher position. After you release the anchorage
button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or squeez-
ing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt
anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoul-
der belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
•
W earing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoul-
der and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on
your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
97
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjust-
able upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is
in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can
provide you with a Seat Belt Extender . The Seat
Belt Extender should be used only if the existing
seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt
Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly fit
the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE
the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center
of the occupant’s body is LESS than
6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
WARNING!
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants in-
cluding pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the shoul-
der belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to re-
move slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the perfor-
mance of the seat belt by removing slack from
the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in
child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags,
the pretensioners are single use items. A de-
ployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must
be replaced immediately.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
SAFETY
98
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help fur -
ther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Re-
straints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Captain’s Chairs Second Row
(6 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
99
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-
section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as
the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing nec-
essary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, in-
cluding a child in a rear -facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear -facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Auto-
matic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt
function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in
the Service Manual.
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
SAFETY
100
WARNING!
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear -facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restrain-
ing the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head re-
straint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter -
mines whether the severity or type of rear im-
pact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires de-
ployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary
rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based
on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft
Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decora-
tive Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
101
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a collision.
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or
portable DVD players. These items may inter -
fere with the operation of the Active Head
Restraint in the event of a collision and could
result in serious injury or death.
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental de-
ployment of the Active Head Restraint, en-
sure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo
could contact the Active Head Restraint dur -
ing sudden stops. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your V ehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered dur-
ing a collision, the front half of the head re-
straint will be extended forward and separated
from the rear half of the head restraint (See
Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs
have deployed. The head restraint must be reset
into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An autho-
rized FCA US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs
on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat before
driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could
impair their function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on oth-
ers. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer .
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
SAFETY
102
Air Bag System Components. Y our vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag W arning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the ST ART or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply sys-
tem that may deploy the air bag system even if
the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag W arning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag W arning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag W arn-
ing Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• The Air Bag W arning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag W arning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer , tachometer , or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag W arning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If
the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
103
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag W arning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
W arning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition,
a single chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag W arning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Y our Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger .
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag de-
ployment could cause serious injury, in-
cluding death. Air bags need room to in-
flate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, in-
cluding a child in a rear -facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear -facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
SAFETY
104
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the sever-
ity and type of collision as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo-
nents.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle
switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may pro-
duce substantial vehicle damage — for ex-
ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decel-
eration over time, vehicle speed and damage by
themselves are not good indicators of whether or
not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you
in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
105
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, ste-
reos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supple-
mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in ad-
dition to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover .
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag Label
SAFETY
106
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the out-
side edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are posi-
tioned in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim cov-
ering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as in-
tended, do not install any accessory items
in your vehicle which could alter the roof.
Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
107
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sen-
sors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is cali-
brated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side im-
pacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently;
a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags
only and a right-side impact deploys the right
Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not im-
pact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door , side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where ap-
propriate) are necessary for your protection
in all collisions. They also help keep you in
position, away from an inflating Side Air
Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with
their backs against the seats. Children
must be properly restrained in a child re-
straint or booster seat that is appropriate
for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window . Sit up-
right in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
SAFETY
108
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
rollover events. The ORC determines whether
the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a par -
ticular rollover event is appropriate, based on
the severity and type of collision. V ehicle dam-
age by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing system determines
if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event
the vehicle experiences a rollover or near roll-
over event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag W arning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by con-
tact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However , if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a nor-
mal by-product of the process that generates
the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
109
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose
or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irrita-
tion continues, see your doctor . If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manu-
facturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies re-
placed by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If
Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 min-
utes from the intervention of the Enhanced
Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HV AC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and re-
move the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and start-
ing the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below . If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
SAFETY
110
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the en-
gine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. Y ou could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, includ-
ing adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument
panel. Do not modify the front bumper ,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be ser -
viced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’ s systems per -
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
111
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gen-
der, age, and crash location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every
Canadian province, requires that small children
ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats rather
than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can be-
come a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured
or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’ s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. Y ou should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
SAFETY
112
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Re-
straint, facing rearward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear -facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger , who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
V ehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear -facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear -facing child restraint. Two
types of child restraints can be used rear -facing:
infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear -facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit
of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can
be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in
the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear -facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear -facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear -facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear -facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, in-
cluding a child in a rear-facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
113
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear -facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-
facing child seats and convertible child seats
used in the forward-facing direction are for chil-
dren who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear -facing weight or height limit
of their rear -facing convertible child seat. Chil-
dren should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to
the highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should
use a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat for-
ward or rearward because it can loosen the
child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle
seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause se-
rious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
SAFETY
114
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the
lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
WARNING!
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear -Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
XX
Rear -Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
115
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor -
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must
be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions
(7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchor -
ages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
116
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions
(5 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchor -
ages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH
Positions (6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchor -
ages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
117
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’ s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH
system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’ s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
No – 5 Passenger
N/A — 6 Passenger
No — 7 Passenger
7 and 5 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center posi-
tion does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an
outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’ s manual for more in-
formation.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes — 5 Passenger
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
5 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the center position may be removed.
7 Passenger: The head restraint in the center position may be removed in the second
row.
SAFETY
118
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the gap between the seatback and
seat cushion.
Five Passenger Rear Seat Lower
Anchorages
Six Passenger Rear Seat Lower
Anchorages
Seven Passenger Rear Seat Lower
Anchorages
119
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Five Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
(Captain's Chair)
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap
Mounting (2nd Row Bench)
SAFETY
120
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or connector
to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to
tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear -
facing child restraints will also be equipped with
a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook
at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached
to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Five Or Seven Second
Row Passenger Seating Only
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This
position is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether —
Five Or Seven Passenger Seating Only
For rear -facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts,
the rear center seat position has an armrest
tether that secures the arm rest in the upward
position.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap
Tether Anchorages
121
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the
plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the
plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
to the strap located on the front of the arm
rest.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt,
stow the seat belt, following the instructions
below. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower an-
chorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline
the seat and / or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. Y ou may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
SAFETY
122
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con-
nect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according
to the child restraint manufacturer’ s
instructions.
6.
Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor . Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’ s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child re-
straint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in
the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when in-
stalling an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve-
hicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’ s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to
keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor . If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retrac-
tor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de-
scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” for additional information on ALR.
123
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row
(6 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
124
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’ s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
W eight limit of the Child Re-
straint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child re-
straint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes — 5 Passenger
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
5 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the center position
may be removed.
7 Passenger: The head restraint in the center position may
be removed in the second row .
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’ s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear -most position to make room for the child
seat. Y ou may also move the front seat for -
ward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
125
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing re-
tracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor . If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child re-
straint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Us-
ing the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
9.
Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear -facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
WARNING!
rear -facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for
the location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. Y ou may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
SAFETY
126
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the two posts. If
not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On
Seatback)
Five Passenger Bench Seat Top Tether
Strap Mounting
Seven Passenger Bench Seat Top Tether
Strap Mounting
127
6.
Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks, lo-
cated on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and pos-
sible injury to the child. Use only the an-
chorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passen-
ger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT P ASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather . Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
SAFETY
128
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heat-
ing or cooling controls to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the under -
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a
competent mechanic inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for bro-
ken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passen-
ger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically , check-
ing for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged
parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system in-
spected at your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have your authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See your authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
129
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your ve-
hicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-
fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to inter-
fere with the accelerator , brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALW AYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over . Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
WARNING!
• ALW AYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER in-
stall or stack an additional floor mat on top
of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured
to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’ s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the ac-
celerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If
your floor mat interferes with the operation
of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor ,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’ s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
• ALW AYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’ s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-
jects could change the position of the floor
mat and may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat fasten-
ers are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully
depress each pedal to check for interfer -
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
SAFETY
130
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and un-
even wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
when using “Track-Use” parts and equip-
ment:
• NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment
on public roads. FCA US LLC does not
authorize the use of “Track-Use” equip-
ment on public roads.
• The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is
for race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver, engi-
neers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
WARNING!
• FCA US LLC does not authorize the instal-
lation or use of any part noted as “Track-
Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first
retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALW AYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-
ment before driving on public roads.
• ALW AYS properly use your three-point seat
belts when driving on public roads.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. Y ou can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
131
132
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .............135
Normal Starting ................135
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS –
NON-SRT.....................138
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS – SRT
. .138
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..........139
Ignition Park Interlock ............140
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System ....................140
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode .........140
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission. . . .141
DRIVE MODES — SRT ..............143
Launch Control — If Equipped .......144
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .........145
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .........145
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped .........145
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped . .145
Shifting Procedure ..............147
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....148
Automatic Mode ...............149
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................149
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode ................150
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ....................150
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System .....................150
System Malfunction .............151
SPEED CONTROL.................151
Activation ...................151
Setting A Desired Speed ..........152
V arying The Speed ..............152
Resume Speed ................153
Accelerating For Passing ..........153
Deactivation ..................153
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) .......153
Activation ...................153
Setting A Desired Speed ...........153
V arying The Speed ..............154
To Resume...................155
Deactivation .................155
Setting The Following Distance .......156
ACC Operation At Stop ............156
Changing Modes ...............156
General Information .............157
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST.........158
ParkSense Sensors ..............158
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .....158
Instrument Cluster Display .........158
ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . .158
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST . .159
ParkSense Sensors ..............159
Activation/Deactivation............160
Engagement/Disengagement ........160
Operation With A Trailer ...........160
General W arnings ...............160
LANESENSE ...................161
LaneSense Operation.............161
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ........161
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP CAMERA ......161
STARTING AND OPERATING
133
Symbols And Messages On The Display . .161
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............162
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . .164
Materials Added To Fuel ..........164
TRAILER TOWING ................165
Trailer Towing W eights (Maximum Trailer
W eight Ratings)— Non SRT .........165
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
Equipped ...................165
Trailer Towing W eights (Maximum Trailer
W eight Ratings)— SRT............167
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.) .......................167
Towing This V ehicle Behind Another
V ehicle .....................167
Recreational Towing — Rear -Wheel Drive
Models .....................168
Recreational Towing — All Wheel Drive
Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . .168
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case) .....168
STARTING AND OPERATING
134
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into P ARK and apply the
parking brake.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed
from the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leav-
ing children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally in-
jured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
WARNING!
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter -N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather . Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while push-
ing the ENGINE STAR T/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1.
Place the gear selector in P ARK, then push and
release the ENGINE STAR T/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in P ARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in P ARK and the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a“Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
135
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the EN-
GINE ST AR T/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH
(1.9 km/h), the vehicle will AutoPark. See Au-
toPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE ST ART/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in P ARK should the situa-
tions on the following pages occur . It is a back
up system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will en-
gage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in P ARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by verifying that a solid (not blink-
ing) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector . If
the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is
not in P ARK. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exit-
ing the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is
not designed to replace the need to shift
WARNING!
your vehicle into P ARK. It is a back up
system and should not be relied upon as
the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
• V ehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
sion
• V ehicle is not in PARK
• V ehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change
to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition
switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver
turns the ignition switch OFF.
STARTING AND OPERATING
136
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
• V ehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
sion
• V ehicle is not in PARK
• V ehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P
then Shift to Gear”will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P”will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH
(1.9 km/h), the transmission will default to
NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops be-
low 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle left in the
NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
• V ehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the Driver’s Door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the shifter . As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
137
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS – NON-SRT
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-
tion in low gear can be detrimental and should
be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur . For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servic-
ing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS – SRT
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum durability
for your new SR T Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class
manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other.
This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the
first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe
the following driving behaviors during the new
vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for
an extended period of time.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration
in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING
138
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting
manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driv-
ing schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher through the first oil change interval. Run-
ning the engine with an oil level below the add
mark can cause severe engine damage.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the ve-
hicle to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear selec-
tor out of P ARK with the brake pedal re-
leased. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage P ARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting
to PARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of P ARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting
a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into P ARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in P ARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, re-
move the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
139
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-
ing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could op-
erate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
CAUTION!
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in P ARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadver-
tently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in P ARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in P ARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in P ARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in P ARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out
of P ARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal
must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the
vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the “eco” button in the
center stack of the instrument panel to activate
or disable ECO mode. A light on the button
indicates when ECO mode is disabled for non-
SR T models. ECO mode can be enabled or
disabled through your Uconnect system for SR T
models.
STARTING AND OPERATING
140
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is en-
abled, the vehicle control systems will change
the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• In SRT models, the transmission will launch
(from a stop) in 2nd gear.
• The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporar -
ily inhibited based on temperature and other
factors.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range is displayed both
on the gear selector and in the instrument clus-
ter. To select a gear range, press the lock button
on the gear selector and move the selector
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. Y ou must also
press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects P ARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink con-
tinuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmis-
sion electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the
first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to P ARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (be-
side the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift
paddles (+/-), if equipped, will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the cur -
rent gear in the instrument cluster . Refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further informa-
tion.
ECO Button
141
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick,
+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear
is displayed in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3,
etc.). Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE-
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick al-
lows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate
undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many
other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear se-
lector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
the DRIVE position), or tap one of the shift
paddles on the steering wheel (if equipped).
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Lock Button
2 — Gear Selector
AutoStick Shift Paddles
STARTING AND OPERATING
142
Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if equipped) to
enter AutoStick mode will downshift the trans-
mission to the next lower gear , while tapping (+)
to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current
gear. The current transmission gear will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick
mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
MANUAL position), or the shift paddles (if
equipped), to manually shift the transmission.
Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in the
MANUAL (M) position, or tapping the (-) shift
paddle (if equipped), will downshift the trans-
mission to the next lower gear . Tapping the
selector rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift
paddle, if equipped) will command an upshift.
NOTE:
The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled
(or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Personal Settings or the SR T Drive Modes.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift
up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by
the driver , unless an engine lugging or over-
speed condition would result. It will remain in
the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lug-
ging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift
to first gear when coming to a stop. After a
stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in second gear . Starting out in second
gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur .
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if
equipped), or holding the gear selector in the
(-) position, will downshift the transmission to
the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold
the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear
selector is already in DRIVE) until "D" is once
again indicated in the instrument cluster. You
can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
DRIVE MODES — SRT
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive
Mode feature. This feature gives the driver con-
trol over the systems in the vehicle which affect
its performance, enabling the driver to tune it
for desired driving scenarios.
NOTE:
Refer to “SR T Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further descriptions of
these modes.
143
Launch Control — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control
system that is designed to allow the driver to
achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a
straight line. Launch Control is a form of trac-
tion control that manages tire slip while launch-
ing the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where
consistent quarter mile (400m) and 0 to 60
(100km/h) times are desired. The system is not
intended to compensate for lack of driver expe-
rience or familiarity with the race track. Use of
this feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel,
etc.) conditions may results in excess wheel slip
outside this systems control resulting in an
aborted launch.
NOTE:
Launch control is not available within the first
500 miles (804 km) of engine break-in.
Preconditions:
• Launch control should not be used on public
roads. Always check track conditions and the
surrounding area.
• Launch Control should only be used when the
engine and transmission are at operating tem-
perature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry,
paved road surfaces only . Use on slippery or
loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle
components and is not recommended.
Launch Control is available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center
stack switch bank.
NOTE:
Pushing the SR T button on the center stack
or pressing Race Options within Drive
Modes, then selecting the Launch Control
tab, followed by the soft, Launch Control
button are two other options to access
launch control features. Please refer to “SRT
Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in the Own-
er’s Manual, or the “Drive Modes Supple-
ment”, for further information.
2. Push the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on
the touchscreen. This screen will allow you
to adjust your launch RPM’ s for optimum
launch/traction.
3. Push the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen.
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing
straight.
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is
in “DRIVE” or “AutoStick” position.
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply and
hold the accelerator pedal to wide open
throttle. The engine speed will hold at the
RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM
Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
to inform the driver if one or more of the above
conditions have not been met.
8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been
met, the instrument cluster display will read
“Launch Ready Release Brake”.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle
reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the
ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING
144
Launch control will abort before launch comple-
tion, display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster
under any the following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during
launch. ESC system continues in ESC Full
ON.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no
longer moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change
the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels
are spinning and do not have traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up for
typical enthusiast driving. The engine, trans-
mission, and steering systems are all set to their
SPOR T settings. Sport Mode will provide im-
proved throttle response and modified shifting
for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may
be activated and deactivated by pushing the
Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient
full-time all-wheel drive. No driver interaction is
required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) Sys-
tem, which combines standard ABS and Trac-
tion Control, provides resistance to any wheel
that is slipping to allow additional torque trans-
fer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to
“Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” in
the Owner's Manual for further information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is
operated by the A WD Control Switch, which is
located on the center console.
This electronically shifted transfer case pro-
vides three mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (A WD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
145
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is de-
signed to be driven in the AWD AUTO position
for normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the A WD AUTO
mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle
is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the
rear wheels. All-wheel drive will be automati-
cally engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction.
When additional traction is required, the trans-
fer case LOW RANGE position can be used to
lock the front and rear driveshafts together forc-
ing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating
the A WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shift-
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only .
Driving in the LOW RANGE position on dry hard
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages
(A WD AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in
the instrument cluster and indicate the current
and desired transfer case selection. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor -
mation. When you select a different transfer
case position, the position indicator lights will
do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop flash-
ing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, turn the control knob back to the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry
selection. To find the shift requirements, refer
to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer
case, located in this section.
The “SER V AWD” Warning Light monitors the
electronic shift all-wheel drive system. If this
light remains on after engine start up or illumi-
nates during driving, it means that the all-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly and that
service is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING
146
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when pow-
ering down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD
W arning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to
roll which may cause personal injury.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE,
the engine speed is approximately three times
that of the AWD AUTO position at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circum-
ference on each wheel. Any difference in tire
size can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved trac-
tion, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see the
information below:
AWD Auto
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends
power to the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive
system will be automatically engaged when the
vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional
traction for varying road conditions.
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range pro-
vides low speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
NEUTRAL – This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another ve-
hicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the trans-
fer case in the NEUTRAL position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages
both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in P ARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been
met. To retry a shift: return the control switch
back to the original position, make certain all
shift requirements have been met, wait five
seconds and try the shift again.
147
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current po-
sition indicator light will turn OFF, the se-
lected position indicator light will flash until
the transfer case completes the shift. When
the shift is complete, the position indicator
light for the selected position will stop flash-
ing and remain ON.
AWD Auto To Low Range
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal
and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occu-
pants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle roll-
ing 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. Use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the A WD control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
ON (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position
and engine running, shift the transmission
to NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
ON (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
• If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or
Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift or if they no longer are
being met while the shift attempt is in pro-
cess, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position
indicator light is ON, until all requirements
have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN posi-
tion for a shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If the
ignition switch is not in the RUN position,
then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shift procedure, refer to “Shift-
ing Into NEUTRAL (N)” in “Recreational Tow-
ing”.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter , enhanced battery, and other up-
graded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
STARTING AND OPERATING
148
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled af-
ter every normal customer engine
start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/ST ART READY
state. A STOP/STAR T READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster” in “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Au-
tostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Start-
ing And Operating” section located in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about
the operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
• HV AC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
• HV AC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop In-
clude:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/ST AR T system
going into a STOP/STAR T READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
149
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
While in a forward gear , the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will auto-
matically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HV AC is set to full defrost mode.
• HV AC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
• STOP/STAR T OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/STAR T system error occurs.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
1. Push the STOP/ST AR T OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/ST ART OFF” message will ap-
pear in instrument cluster display within the
Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in “Getting To Know Y our Instru-
ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
STOP/START system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The STOP/ST AR T system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/ST AR T OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch will
turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start System
refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting
And Operating” section located in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
STOP/START Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
150
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/ST ART
system, the system will not shut down the en-
gine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“
in “Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/ST AR T SYSTEM” mes-
sage appears in the instrument cluster display,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear
on the instrument cluster display to indicate the
speed control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. CRUISE CON-
TROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster
display to indicate the speed control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. Y ou could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. Y ou could lose control and
have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push CANC/Cancel
2 — Push SET (+)/Accel
3 — Push RES/Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push SET (-)/Decel
151
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set a
message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the instru-
ment cluster display when the speed is set.
Varying The Speed
Once the Speed Control has been activated, the
speed can be increased or decreased.
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In-
strument Panel” in the Owner’ s Manual for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In-
strument Panel” in the Owner’ s Manual for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
STARTING AND OPERATING
152
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Accelerating For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control, the controls operate exactly the same
as the speed control with only a couple of
differences. With this option you can set a
specified distance you would like to maintain
between you and the vehicle in front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration auto-
matically to maintain a preset following dis-
tance, while matching the speed of the vehicle
ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of
you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Activation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button.
“ACC READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
Setting A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is
set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/
Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
153
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display.
•
The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The
vehicle speed will only be determined by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
Varying The Speed
Once the ACC has been activated, the speed
can be increased or decreased.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to deceler-
ate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, the host vehicle will release the
vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driv-
ing up hill and down hill. However , a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation
and necessary to maintain set speed. When driv-
ing up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds nor-
mal range (overheated).
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In-
strument Panel” in the Owner’ s Manual for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
STARTING AND OPERATING
154
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-
creased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the in-
strument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the in-
strument cluster display.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the system will cancel
and the brake force will be ramped-out. The
driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the
vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close
proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for prevail-
ing traffic and road conditions could cause the
vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply
for safe operation. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or seri-
ous personal injury.
Deactivation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the
system off.
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
ACC is off.
WARNING!
Leaving the ACC system on when not in use is
dangerous. Y ou could accidentally set the sys-
tem or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
155
Setting The Following Distance
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me-
dium) and one bar (short). Using this distance
setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates
and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument clus-
ter display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Increase button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Decrease button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the
target vehicle starts moving within two seconds
of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for
any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a stand-
still, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and
the brakes will release. A cancel message will
display on the instrument cluster display and
produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
Changing Modes
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode
can be turned off and the system can be oper -
ated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode. When in the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control mode the distance setting fea-
ture will be disabled and the system will main-
tain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise con-
trol modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and
the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control mode.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’ s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
STARTING AND OPERATING
156
WARNING!
and weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor-
tantly, brake operation to ensure safe opera-
tion of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a dis-
abled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be lim-
ited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• W ill bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop posi-
tion. If the target vehicle does not start
WARNING!
moving within two seconds the ACC sys-
tem will display a message that the system
will release the brakes and that the brakes
must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway con-
struction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are wind-
ing, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
WARNING!
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
your Owner’s Manual.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware
of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes func-
tion differently. Always confirm which mode
is selected.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
157
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle that is within the sensors’ field of view . The
sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizon-
tal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. When the gear selec-
tor is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will
display the “P ARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily ,
and then the LED will be on.
Instrument Cluster Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’ s
Manual for further information.
The ParkSense W arning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Y our Instrument Panel” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING
158
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the RE-
VERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster display will show a
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an ob-
stacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” mes-
sage to appear in the instrument cluster
display.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, includ-
ing small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR
PARK ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle that is within the sensors field of view . The
sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view .
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
159
When an object is detected within 79 inches
(200 cm) behind the rear bumper while the
vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appear in
the instrument cluster display. In addition a
chime will sound (when Sound and Display is
selected from the Customer Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect System screen).
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
chime rate will change from single 1/2 second
tone (for rear only), to slow (for rear only), to fast,
to continuous.
Activation/Deactivation
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides vi-
sual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a de-
tected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Trans-
mission, the vehicle brakes may be automati-
cally applied and released when performing a
reverse parking maneuver if the system detects
a possible collision with an obstacle.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selec-
tor is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the
system will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. A display warning will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will be-
come active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
Engagement/Disengagement
To disengage the system, push the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the system passes from engaged to dis-
engaged and vice versa, it is always accompa-
nied by a dedicated message in the instrument
cluster display.
System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off.
System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED on
constantly.
The ParkSense switch LED lights up also in the
case of a ParkSense system failure. If the button
is pushed with a system failure, the ParkSense
switch LED flashes for about five seconds, then
it stays on constantly.
After the ParkSense has been disengaged, it will
stay in this condition until the following engage-
ment, even if the ignition device passes from
ON/RUN to OFF and then again to ON/RUN.
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The
sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
General Warnings
If “PARKSENSE UNAV AILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "P ARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the instru-
ment cluster display, clean the ParkSense sen-
sors with water , car wash soap and a soft cloth.
Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING
160
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a for -
ward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system pro-
vides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out
of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides visual warnings through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque)
warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’ s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible warning to the driver when the driver’ s
hands are not detected on the steering wheel.
The system will cancel if the driver does not
return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED
in LaneSense button will be illuminated while
the system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located
on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “Lane-
Sense On” message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last sys-
tem state on or off from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA
Symbols And Messages On The Display
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of
your vehicle whenever the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on the
Uconnect Display, located on the center stack of
the instrument panel.
If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, clean the
camera lens located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
161
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in P ARK, NEUTRAL or DRIVE,
the Rear View Camera can be activated with the
“Rear V iew Camera” button in the Controls menu.
This feature allows the customer to monitor the
area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if
equipped) for up to ten seconds while at speed. If
the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed
continuously until deactivated via the “X” button
on the touchscreen.
Refer to “ParkV iew Rear Back-Up Camera” in
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner's
Manual for further details.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up;
even when using the ParkView Rear Back-Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. Y ou must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (lo-
cated under the headlamp switch).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING
162
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
door while refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the
latches allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door
to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
door open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and fed-
eral fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel con-
tainers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
163
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door , use
the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin
to the center , this will pop up the outboard
edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door ,
push the release cable back to the home
position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the
closed position.
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator
latch should be manually returned to the closed
position.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of
detergents to further
aide in minimizing en-
gine and fuel system
deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER De-
tergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Storage Bin Location
Emergency Release Cable
STARTING AND OPERATING
164
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)— Non SRT
Engine Model
GCWR (Gross Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L RWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lbs (4,037 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
3.6L RWD 11,600 lbs (5,262 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L A WD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lbs (4,037 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
3.6L A WD 11,600 lbs (5,262 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L RWD 13,100 lbs (5,942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3,357 kg) 740 lbs (336 kg)
5.7L A WD 13,100 lbs (5,942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,266 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Ser-
vicing And Maintenance” in the Owner's
Manual for further information. The addition
of passengers and cargo may require reducing
trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer W eight
(GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer)
may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of
3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
• V ehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow
package are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs
tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This cover is located at the bottom center of the
rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and pull bottom of the
hitch receiver cover outward (towards you).
165
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (to-
wards you) then downwards to disengage the
tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver
cover to remove.
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the
procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Cover Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
Hitch Receiver Cover Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Cover Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
STARTING AND OPERATING
166
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)— SRT
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
6.4L Automatic 14,600 lbs (6,622 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 8,700 lbs (3,901 kg) 870 lbs (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight refer -
enced on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for further information.
• The manufacturer does not recommend using
the run flat feature while driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
•
See Instructions
• Transmission In P ARK
• Transfer Case In NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow In Forward Direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
167
NOTE:
Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT ve-
hicles.
These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive mod-
els) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1.
Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5.
Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New V ehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All Wheel Drive
Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These mod-
els do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the
transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New V ehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEU-
TRAL (N) and the transmission must be in
PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL
(N) selection button is adjacent to the transfer
case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with
the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow with
all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
STARTING AND OPERATING
168
CAUTION!
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in P ARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL(N)” to be certain that the trans-
fer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Other -
wise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New V ehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the trans-
fer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position with-
out first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disen-
gages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU-
TRAL (N) before recreational towing to pre-
vent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEU-
TRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind
the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYS-
TEM IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in
the instrument cluster.
5. After the shift is completed and the NEU-
TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-
TRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
169
11. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
12. Push the ENGINE STOP/ST ART button
twice (without pressing the brake pedal) to
turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the en-
gine running. With the transfer case in NEU-
TRAL (N) ensure that the engine is OFF
before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using
a suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEU-
TRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into P ARK and turn
the engine OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
STARTING AND OPERATING
170
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
171
172
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..........174
Control .....................174
BULB REPLACEMENT ..............174
Replacement Bulbs .............174
FUSES ......................176
General Information .............176
Underhood Fuses ...............176
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING..........180
Run Flat Tires — SR T Models........181
Jack Location .................181
Spare Tire Stowage ..............181
Spare Tire Removal ..............182
Preparations For Jacking...........183
Jacking Instructions .............184
Road Tire Installation.............188
JUMP STARTING .................188
Preparations For Jump Start.........188
Jump Starting Procedure ..........189
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..........190
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .............191
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...........192
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........193
Rear Wheel Drive Models ..........195
All Wheel Drive Models ...........195
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . .196
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ......................196
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .........196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
173
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Control
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on
the switch bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
W arning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will con-
tinue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
174
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Bi-Halogen Head-
lamps (Base)
9005SL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps (Uplevel) 9005SL+
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base) 3157NAK
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium) 3157NAK
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp (Uplevel & Premium) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced A Authorized Dealer)
175
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker
cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety sys-
tems (air bag system, braking system),
WARNING!
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery dis-
charge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This cen-
ter contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds
to the following chart.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Y ellow – Radiator Fan
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
Power Distribution Center
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
176
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake V acuum Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR (Low Temperature Radiator) Engine Cooling Pump
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front W ipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/V alves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
177
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential - If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering Column Lock
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel engine only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Passenger W indow Switches/Rain Sensor
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module — If Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
178
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear W iper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM — If Equipped
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-Intrusion Module
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
179
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera/ParkSense
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger — If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow V entilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/DSRC
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams — If Equipped
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
F104 – 20 Amp Y ellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system fail-
ure.
CAUTION!
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-
tant to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow , it
indicates a problem in the circuit that
must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger -
ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. Y ou could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
180
WARNING!
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Run Flat Tires — SRT Models
SR T models are equipped with “run flat” tires.
Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be driven
approximately 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph
(88 km/h). Tire service should be obtained to
avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is illumi-
nated. V ehicle handling and braking may be
reduced. You could have a collision and be
severely or fatally injured.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of
the jack to loosen the jack and remove from the
bracket.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism.
To remove or stow the spare, use the jack
handle/lug wrench connected to the square
socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive”
nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just in-
side the liftgate opening.
Jack Location
Jack Removal
181
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only . Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug
from storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive
nut. Use the lug wrench handle and exten-
sion to completely lower the spare tire. Keep
turning the handle until the winch stops.
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and
rotate it vertically behind the rear bumper.
5. Pull the metal stamping toward you to re-
lease it from the plastic plate.
Spare Tire Location
Winch Drive Nut Location
Spare Tire Removal
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
182
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel exten-
sion tube and winch cable. Rotate the metal
stamping and push it through the hole in the
plastic plate and wheel.
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to
remove the protective plate from the steel
spare wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard W arning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Spare Tire Retainer
Retainer Removal
Protective Plate Removal
183
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right front wheel is being
changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
WARNING!
• If working on or near a roadway, be ex-
tremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Wheel Blocked
Jack Warning Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
184
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the
rear tire. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack And Tools Assembled
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Location
185
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle just enough to
remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise
the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-
shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor -
rectly.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tight-
ened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications”
in “Technical Specifications” for proper lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a ser -
vice station.
10. Push out the small center cap using the
jack tool from inside the aluminum road
wheel and position the wheel behind the
rear bumper with the protective plate fac-
ing outward.
Rear Jacking Location
Spare Tire Mounting
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
186
NOTE:
The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel
from being scratched when sliding it under
the vehicle.
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic
protective plate in the lug holes of the road
wheel. Push the end of the winch’ s cable,
spring, steel sleeve and stamped cone
shape wheel plate though the road wheel
and protective plate.
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using
the protective plate until it is directly under
the winch and between the rear bumper
and exhaust system heat shields. Raise the
tire by turning the lug wrench on the winch
extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug
against the underbody of the vehicle. Dam-
age to the winch cable may result if the
vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only . Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
Return the tools to the proper positions in
the tool bag. Fold the flap on the tool bag
under the tools and roll the tools in the bag
underneath the others. Use the hook and
loop fasteners to secure the tool bag to the
jack with the lug wrench on the forward
side of the jack. Expand the jack on the
bracket by turning the thumb screw clock-
wise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of
the cargo area. Roll up and store the Jack,
Tool Kit and Tire Changing Instructions.
Reinstall the cover for the jack in the rear
storage bin.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible and properly
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop, could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided.
Protective Plate
Flat Tire Storage
187
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery , it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system volt-
age greater than 12 V olts or damage to the
battery, starter motor , alternator or electrical
system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions
and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote termi-
nals located under the hood to assist in jump
starting.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
188
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate hydro-
gen gas which is flammable and explosive.
Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not
touch each other, or either vehicle, until prop-
erly connected for jump starting.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into P ARK and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater , radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote
positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the
cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could re-
sult in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3.
Connect the negative end
(-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to ex-
plode and could result in personal injury. Only
use the specific ground point, do not use any
other exposed metal parts.
189
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage
booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the re-
mote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charg-
ing system tested at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’ s battery ,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’ s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can re-
duce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-
crease the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine cool-
ing system and turning the A/C off can help
remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
190
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the ve-
hicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on
HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you
should be seated in the driver’ s seat with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal when activat-
ing the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle
to roll away if it is not secured by the parking
brake, or by proper connection to a tow ve-
hicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the
vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as
a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is avail-
able.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover , remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover Removed
191
5. While the metal latch is in the open position,
pull upward on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released posi-
tion. The transmission is now out of P ARK
and the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the Manual
Park Release mechanism, the transmission,
and/or the armrest.
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, ap-
ply tension upward while pushing the re-
lease latch towards the tether to unlock the
lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed
properly and locks into position.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator .
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or RE-
VERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-
sure that will maintain the rocking motion with-
out spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
Released Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
192
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off"
switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission overheat-
ing and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed
as described under “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”.
NOTE:
SRT Models: The manufacturer requires towing
your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
193
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive Models All-Wheel Drive
Models With Single-
Speed Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE
If Transmission Is Operable:
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions in “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating”
•
Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Front
If Transmission Is Operable:
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’ s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bum-
pers or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be ob-
served.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrost-
ers, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this section for instructions on shift-
ing the transmission out of PARK for towing or
loading onto a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. V ehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
194
Rear Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your ve-
hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer
to "Manual Park Release" in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the
New V ehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the ve-
hicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable
methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly , or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels
in the straight position) with the rear wheels
raised and the front wheels on the ground.
All Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are
to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of
the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a two-
speed transfer case may be towed (in the for-
ward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for de-
tailed instructions.
V ehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL position, and therefore
must be towed will all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the transmis-
sion or transfer case will occur if a front or
rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New V ehicle Limited Warranty.
195
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be lo-
cated on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or high-
way towing. You could damage your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information on the En-
hanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’ s systems performed under cer -
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — NON-SRT .....198
Maintenance Plan — Non-SR T .......198
Heavy Duty Use Of The V ehicle .......200
SCHEDULED SERVICING – SRT .........200
Maintenance Plan — SR T ..........202
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............205
3.6L Engine ..................205
5.7L Engine ..................206
6.4L Engine ..................207
RAISING THE VEHICLE ..............208
TIRES ......................208
Tire Safety Information ...........208
Tires — General Information ........215
Tire Types ...................219
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........220
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........222
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ................223
Treadwear ...................223
Traction Grades ................223
Temperature Grades .............224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
197
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
NON-SRT
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indica-
tor system will remind you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-
trips, trailer tow , extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influ-
ence when the “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (800 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM’ s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Maintenance Plan — Non-SRT
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
198
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary .
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake func-
tion.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
199
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Change transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser -
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
WARNING!
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM’ s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
SCHEDULED SERVICING – SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in
this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect your vehicle war-
ranty and ensure the best vehicle performance
and reliability. More frequent maintenance may
be needed for vehicles in severe operating con-
ditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
200
The instrument cluster display will display an
“Oil Change Required” message and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (800 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six
months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive
your vehicle off-road for an extended period of
time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or
six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than your autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in this guide.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this section for further infor-
mation.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add
if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
engine oil, brake master cylinder , and add as
needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
201
Maintenance Plan — SRT
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter .
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it oc-
curs before scheduled maintenance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: dusty or off-road condi-
tions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter; replace if necessary .
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
XXXXX
Drain the transfer case and refill. X X X X X
Inspect the accessory drive belts
replace if necessary .
XX
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
202
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Change if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
sustained high speed driving, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
XXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot seals, for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage, wear ,
improper looseness or end play; re-
place if necessary .
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner filter . X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary
X
Replace the spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 120 months if not done at
150,000 miles (240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
203
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser -
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an ac-
cident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
204
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — W asher Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Filter Access 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
205
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — W asher Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
206
6.4L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — W asher Fluid Reservoir
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Air Cleaner Filter 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
207
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Iden-
tification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defi-
nitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to
this standard have the tire size molded into
the sidewall beginning with the section width.
The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. The size designa-
tion for LT-Metric tires is the same as for
P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size des-
ignation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Desig-
nation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear ,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
208
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
209
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however , the date code may only be on
one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the
full TIN, including the date code, located on the
white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found
on the outboard side, then you will find it on the
inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
210
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a mini-
mum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
V ehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire plac-
ard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
211
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, includ-
ing the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly
and inflate to the recommended pressure for
your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. Y ou will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard in “V ehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of your Own-
er’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
212
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. The combined
weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-
ceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely ex-
ceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68)
= 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer , load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage,
and towing capacities of your vehicle with
varying seating configurations and number
and size of occupants. This table is for illus-
tration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
213
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
214
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
• Safety and V ehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread W ear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can af-
fect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsive-
ness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering re-
sponse.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling re-
sistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Over -inflation produces a jarring and un-
comfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
215
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly in-
flated even when they are under -inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from en-
tering the valve stem, which could damage
the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the Win-
ter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be in-
creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-
ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-
hicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca-
pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
216
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re-
paired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A
Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
217
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be re-
placed. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting
in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can re-
sult in sudden tire failure. Y ou could lose
control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be in-
spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph
on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Re-
fer to the Tire and Loading Information placard
or the V ehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Tire Tread
1 — W orn Tire
2 — New Tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
218
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair . Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the origi-
nal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable han-
dling and stress to steering and suspension
components. Y ou could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury
WARNING!
or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes
with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. Y ou could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can re-
sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve-
hicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ -
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer , Fall, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for W inter or cold driving
conditions. Install W inter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow .
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
219
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
tions. You could lose vehicle control, result-
ing in severe injury or death. Driving too fast
for conditions also creates the possibility of
loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter . Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent in
size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec-
ommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit in-
stead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service
Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the origi-
nal equipment tire and wheel found on the front or
rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be
used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your
vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire
dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard located on the driver’ s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
220
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at
any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer -
gency use only. Y ou can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard located on the driver’ s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-
portunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump be-
fore lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
221
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer -
gency use only . This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do
not drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’ s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’ s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportu-
nity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to
do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
W ash wheels with the same soap solution rec-
ommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly . Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
CAUTION!
Such damage is not covered by the New
V ehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner .
These products may damage the wheel's pro-
tective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New V ehicle Limited W arranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
222
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New V ehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND W ATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all
that is required to maintain this finish.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on your
vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addi-
tion to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however , and may depart sig-
nificantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
223
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor V e-
hicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of perfor -
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than
the minimum required by law .
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
224
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .226
Torque Specifications ............226
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT ........227
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ...........228
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT .....228
Engine .....................228
Chassis.....................229
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT........230
Engine .....................230
Chassis.....................231
MOPAR ACCESSORIES ..............231
Authentic Accessories By Mopar ......231
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
225
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Base Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
SRT Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
110 Ft-Lbs
(149 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any
dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug
nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
Torque Pattern
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
226
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W -20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W -20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) –
Without Trailer Tow Package
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) –
With Trailer Tow Package
11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Cool-
ant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
– W ithout Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Cool-
ant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
– W ith Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
227
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile Formula that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
16 Quarts 15.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine W e recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W -20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar , Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine W e recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W -20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar , Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter W e recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs W e recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
228
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ -
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
CAUTION!
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
CAUTION!
rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-
based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equiva-
lent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine W e recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine W e recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
229
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) W e recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder W e recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant W e recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W -40 or
equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter W e recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs W e recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use
E-85).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
230
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equiva-
lent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed W e recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) W e recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) W e recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-
85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder W e recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable.
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
• The following highlights just some of the many
Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar featur-
ing a fit, finish, and functionality specifically
for your Dodge Durango.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium pro-
tection, or extreme entertainment, you also
benefit from enhancing your vehicle with ac-
cessories that have been thoroughly tested
and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accesso-
ries by Mopar , visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Molded Running Boards • Tubular Side Steps • Molded Splash Guards
• Front End Cover • Wheels • Chrome Accents
• Chrome Front Air Deflector
231
INTERIOR:
• Heated Seats • Door Sill Guards • Molded Cargo Tray
• All-Weather Mats • Katzkin Leather Interiors • Bright Pedal Kit
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Ambient Lighting
ELECTRONICS:
• Mopar Web (WiFi) • Rear View Camera • Park Distance Sensors
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Remote Start
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-Mount Bike Carrier • Roof Box Cargo Carrier • Roof Mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Rack • Hitch Receiver • Cargo Basket
• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Roof Mount W ater Sports Carrier
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
232
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ................235
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ......236
Uconnect 4 At A Glance ..........236
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............237
Radio .....................238
Android Auto — If Equipped ........239
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped .240
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH
DISPLAY .....................242
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance .....242
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............243
Radio .....................244
Android Auto — If Equipped ........245
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped .249
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..............251
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION .252
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .......252
Reception Conditions.............252
Care And Maintenance ............252
Anti-Theft Protection .............252
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED .....253
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped (Available
on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display) ....................253
SiriusXM Guardian Activation .......254
Download The Uconnect App ........254
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display) .........255
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account ....................255
Built-In Features ...............255
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . . .258
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL.............260
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ............264
Getting Started ................264
Dual Video Screen ..............265
Blu-ray Disc Player ..............266
Play Video Games...............268
Accessibility — If Equipped .........269
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED .........269
Changing The Navigation V oice Prompt
V olume .....................269
Finding Points Of Interest ..........271
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . .271
One-Step V oice Destination Entry......271
Setting Your Home Location.........271
Home......................272
Adding A Stop.................273
Taking A Detour ................273
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)...............273
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display) ..............273
UCONNECT PHONE ................275
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling).....................275
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile
Phone To The Uconnect System ......277
Common Phone Commands (Examples) .280
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call ..................280
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And
V ehicle ....................280
Phonebook ..................281
V oice Command Tips ............281
MULTIMEDIA
233
Changing The V olume ............281
Using Do Not Disturb.............281
Incoming Text Messages ..........282
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With Y our
Uconnect System ..............283
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS .284
Introducing Uconnect ............284
Get Started ..................284
Basic V oice Commands ...........285
Radio......................285
Media .....................286
Phone .....................286
V oice Text Reply................287
Climate.....................288
Navigation (4C NAV) .............288
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If
Equipped ...................289
Register (4C/4C NAV) ............289
V ehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .289
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ..........290
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) .......290
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ........291
Do Not Disturb ................291
Android Auto — If Equipped ........292
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ........292
General Information .............293
Additional Information ............294
MULTIMEDIA
234
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain se-
curity features to reduce the risk of unauthor-
ized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. V ehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to im-
prove the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s sys-
tems are breached. It may be possible that
vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual ve-
hicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
–
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html
(U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Cana-
dian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media de-
vices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may un-
lawfully intercept information and private com-
munications without your consent. For further
information, refer to ”Data Collection & Privacy”
in your Uconnect Owner’ s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber -
security” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual.
235
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY
Uconnect 4 At A Glance
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur -
poses only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the screen.
Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the
“Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of
the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen
to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance\Fade, Equalizer , Speed Adjusted V ol-
ume, Surround Sound, Loudness, AUX V ol-
ume Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off W ith
Door.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the
Balance/Fade.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
Screen
MULTIMEDIA
236
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar for
each of the equalizer bands. The level value,
which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the bottom of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted V olume” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Speed Ad-
justed Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted
V olume is adjusted by pressing the volume
level indicator. This alters the automatic ad-
justment of the audio volume with variation to
vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen to
activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivate
this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound
quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
• Press the “AUX V olume Offset” button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Off-
set screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted
by pressing of the “+” and “–” buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The
Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and
“Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins play-
ing from a connected device, immediately
after it is connected to the radio.
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
• The Radio automatically turns on when ve-
hicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or
off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With
Door screen. The Radio Off With Door feature,
when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened, or when
the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
1.
Press the “Apps ” button to open the App
screen.
2.
Press and hold, then drag the selected App to
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now be
an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
237
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — Main Category Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse And Manage Presets
10 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
238
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio”
button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM)
button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds to
seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once the
arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the
“Tune” button on the screen, and entering the
desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see
the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow
button on the touchscreen at the top right of the
screen to toggle between the two sets of six
presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps
below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two sec-
onds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Android
Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-
class speech technology, the steering wheel
controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio
faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen
to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto follow the following steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-powered
smartphone.
239
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your ve-
hicle. If you have not downloaded the
Android Auto app to your smartphone before
plugging in the device for the first time, the
app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as after -
market cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the use
of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, Android Auto should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by touch-
ing the Android Auto icon on the touch-
screen, located under Apps.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Once Android Auto has made a connec-
tion through USB, Android Auto will also con-
nect via Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple Car -
Play features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
MULTIMEDIA
240
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay,
the smarter , more secure way to use your iPhone
in the car , and stay focused on the road. Use
your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehi-
cle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri
to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages,
and more.
To use CarPlay , make sure you are using iPhone
5 or later , have Siri enabled in Settings, that
your iPhone is unlocked for the very first con-
nection only, and then use the following proce-
dure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, CarPlay should automatically launch,
but you can also launch it by touching the
CarPlay icon on the touchscreen, located
under Apps.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Y our data and cellular cover-
age is shown on the left side of the radio screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility . Data plan rates apply. V e-
hicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of
use and privacy statements apply.
CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
241
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH
8.4-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser -
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
WARNING!
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur -
poses only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• Model 4C NA V synchronizes time automati-
cally via GPS, so it should not require any time
adjustment. If you do need to set the time
manually, follow the instructions below for
Model 4C NAV.
• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then press
the time display at the top of the screen. Press
“Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the
“Clock” button on the touchscreen, then
check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of
the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like
to set a theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen and select the display menu.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touch-
screen and select a theme.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio Screen
MULTIMEDIA
242
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen
to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance\Fade, Equalizer , and Speed Adjusted
V olume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear ,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the
Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar for
each of the equalizer bands. The level value,
which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted V olume” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Speed Ad-
justed Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted
V olume is adjusted by pressing the volume
level indicator. This alters the automatic ad-
justment of the audio volume with variation to
vehicle speed.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now be
an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
243
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
244
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio”
button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM)
button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds to
seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once the
arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the
“Tune” button on the screen, and entering the
desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see
the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow
button on the touchscreen at the top right of the
screen to toggle between the two sets of six
presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps
below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two sec-
onds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV)
operates similar to conventional radio except
it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-
quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances the
listening experience. HD radio can also trans-
mit data such as song title or artist.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Android
Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
245
Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-
class speech technology, the steering wheel
controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio
faceplate, and the radio display’ s touchscreen
to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto follow these steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your ve-
hicle. If you have not downloaded the
Android Auto app to your smartphone before
plugging in the device for the first time, the
app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as after -
market cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the use
of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once Android Auto has made a connection
through USB, Android Auto will also connect
via Bluetooth. The system displays the
Android Auto home screen. Android Auto
automatically launches, but if it does not,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for the procedure to enable the
feature “AutoShow .” You can also launch it
by pressing Android Auto located in the
“Apps” menu. If you use Android Auto fre-
quently you can move the app to the menu
bar at the bottom of the touchscreen. Press
the “Apps” button and locate the Android
Auto app; then drag the selected App to
replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
Android Auto
MULTIMEDIA
246
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice. Y ou
can also touch the Navigation icon in Android
Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
spoken navigation command launches the
built-in Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-
vides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
Android Auto, via voice or any other method, a
pop-up appears asking if you would like to
switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone
navigation. A pop-up also appears, asking if
you’d like to switch, if Android Auto is currently
in use and you attempt to launch a built-in
Uconnect route. Selecting “Y es” switches the
navigation type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route is planned for the new
destination. If “No” is selected the navigation
type remains unchanged.
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Ca-
nadian Residents).
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to
https://support.google.com/
android or https://support.google.com/
androidauto/.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Google Maps
247
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream endless
music on the road.
NOTE:
For music apps, playlists, and stations to work
with Android Auto, they must be set up on your
smartphone before using Android Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect Sys-
tem’s media screen.
For further information refer to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the com-
patible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded, and
you must be signed in to the app for it to work
with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to
see the latest list of available apps for Android
Auto.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
Android Auto Phone
MULTIMEDIA
248
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple Car -
Play features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay,
the smarter , more secure way to use your iPhone
in the car , and stay focused on the road. Use
your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehi-
cle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri
to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages,
and more.
To use CarPlay , make sure you are using iPhone
5 or later , have Siri enabled in Settings, that
your iPhone is unlocked for the very first con-
nection only, and then use the following proce-
dure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected, the system
displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple
CarPlay automatically launches, but if not,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for the procedure to enable the
feature “AutoShow .” Y ou can also launch it
by pressing the CarPlay icon located in the
“Apps” menu. If you use Apple CarPlay fre-
quently you can move the app to the menu
bar at the bottom of the touchscreen. Press
the “Apps” button and locate the CarPlay
app; then drag and drop the selected App to
replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Y our data and cellular cover-
age is shown on the left side of the radio screen.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
249
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Ve-
hicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of
use and privacy statements apply.
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recog-
nition session. Y ou can also press and hold the
Home button within CarPlay to start talking to
Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to
voice mail as you normally would using Siri on
your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select third
party audio apps including music, news, sports,
podcasts and more.
Messages
Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to use
Siri to send or reply to text messages. Since
everything is done by voice, Siri can also read
incoming text messages so you don’t have to.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to
use Siri to set your desired destination. Alterna-
tively, choose a Nearby destination by pressing
Destinations and selecting a category, by
launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
NOTE:
•
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
Apple Music
Maps
MULTIMEDIA
250
•
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
CarPlay, via voice or any other method, a pop-up
appears asking if you would like to switch from
Uconnect navigation to iPhone navigation. A
pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to
switch, if CarPlay navigation is currently in use
and you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect
route. Selecting “Y es” switches the navigation
type to the newly used method of navigation and
a route will be planned for the new destination. If
“No” is selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
Apps
To use an app that is compatible with CarPlay, you
must have the compatible app already downloaded
to your iPhone and you must also be signed in.
Refer to
http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S.
Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for CarPlay.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access Cus-
tomer Programmable feature settings through
buttons on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Apps” button located near the
bottom of the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to ac-
cess the Settings screen. When making a
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred
setting is highlighted, then press and release
the preferred setting until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. The following feature set-
tings are available:
• Display • Engine Off Options
• Voice • Audio
• Clock • Phone/Bluetooth
• Safety & Driving
Assistance
• SiriusXM Setup
• Lights • Restore Settings
• Compass — If
Equipped
• Clear Personal
Data
• Doors & Locks •
System Information
• Auto-On Comfort
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature set-
tings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
Navigation Pop-Up
251
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL
INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for the
next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station.
Right Switch
• Push the up or down switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the center button to switch between AM,
FM, SXM, AUX/USB, or Bluetooth mode.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while
driving. Reception may be interfered with by the
presence of mountains, buildings or bridges,
especially when you are far away from the
broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into contact
with pointed or rigid objects which could dam-
age its surface; use a soft, dry anti-static cloth
to clean and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system:
this could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft pro-
tection system based on the exchange of infor -
mation with the electronic control unit (Body
Computer) on the vehicle.
This guarantees maximum safety and prevents
the secret code from being entered after the
power supply has been disconnected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the system
will start to operate, whereas if the comparison
codes are not the same or if the electronic
control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the
system will ask the user to enter the secret code.
See an authorized dealer for further informa-
tion.
Steering Wheel Controls
MULTIMEDIA
252
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF
EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention
to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your
hands on the steering wheel. Y ou have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and appli-
cations when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership
and driving experience. When connected to an
operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian
operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using the
Uconnect App from your device. You can also
do so by logging into your owner site, or by
calling SiriusXM Guardian Care when your
vehicle has an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available.
• Receive text or email notifications if your ve-
hicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS
technology to help authorities locate your ve-
hicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST but-
ton on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are lo-
cated on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside As-
sistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM Guardian
Care, and Uconnect Care. The SOS Call
button connects you to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care Agent, who can connect you to emer-
gency services.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is located
in the center of the menu bar of the radio
touchscreen. This is where you can manage
your Apps.
3. The Uconnect V oice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the
left side of your steering wheel. These but-
tons let you use your voice to give com-
mands, make phone calls, send and receive
text messages, enter navigation destina-
tions, and control your radio and media
devices.
253
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle purchase
(date based on vehicle sales notification from
your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first
register with SiriusXM Guardian. After the trial
period, if you wish to continue your SiriusXM
Guardian services you can choose to purchase a
subscription.
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for system
and device compatibility.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guard-
ian in your vehicle, you must activate your
SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button
press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hun-
dreds of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you
parked, using the convenient V ehicle Finder
function.
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route
from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s navi-
gation system.
For further information:.
•
U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/
guardian
•
Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and other valuable services.
To use the Uconnect App:
• Search for and download the Uconnect App
from the store on your compatible iPhone or
Android powered device.
• Log in to the app using the email address and
password you created when you activated the
services.
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
254
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote
Start (if equipped), and activate your horn and
lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the menu button (three horizontal lines)
in the upper left corner of the app to access
settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by log-
ging into your owner account. If you need help
push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror ,
then select SiriusXM Guardian Care or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that
you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account
information from the vehicle. You can do this by
pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and
selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALW AYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some features are limited
while the vehicle is in motion. Some ser -
vices, including SOS, will NOT work with-
out a subscription and an operable network
connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have SOS Call service if
needed. If the rearview mirror light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag W arning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction is de-
tected in any part of the airbag system. If
the Air Bag W arning Light is illuminated,
the air bag system may not be working
properly and the SOS Call system may not
send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an
air bag is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
255
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SOS Call operator . All
occupants should exit the vehicle immedi-
ately and move to a safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add af-
termarket electrical equipment to the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initi-
ate an emergency call. To avoid interfer-
ence that can cause the SOS Call system to
fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’ s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the
Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXM
Guardian services, among others, will not
operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST but-
ton, allowing you to speak to a call center
agent for support:
•
Roadside Assistance Call
— If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow , you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help any-
time. Additional fees may apply. Addi-
tional information in this section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian services.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services
to you, we may record and monitor your conver -
sations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect
Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care,
whether such conversations are initiated
through the SiriusXM Guardian services in your
vehicle, your device, or via a landline device,
and may share information obtained through
such recording and monitoring in accordance
with regulatory requirements. Y ou acknowledge,
agree, and consent to any recording, monitoring
or sharing of information obtained through any
such call recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button
that, when pressed, may place a call from
your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian Care
operator, who can connect you to emergency
Assist And SOS
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
MULTIMEDIA
256
service operators, to request help from local
police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this
button is accidentally pressed, you will have
ten seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press
the SOS Call button again or press the “Can-
cel” button shown on the touchscreen. After
ten seconds has passed, the SOS call will be
placed and only the SOS Call operator can
cancel it. The LED light on the rearview
mirror will turn green once a connection to a
SOS Call operator has been made. The green
LED light will turn off once the SOS Call is
terminated. Have an authorized dealer ser-
vice the vehicle if the rearview mirror light is
continuously red. On equipped vehicles, this
feature requires a functioning electrical sys-
tem, a subscription, and an operable net-
work connection. If a connection is made
between a SOS Call operator and your ve-
hicle, you understand and agree that SOS
Call operators will stay on the line, even
after you connect with emergency services.
The Emergency services operator may, like
any other emergency call, record conversa-
tions and sounds in and near your vehicle
upon connection.
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies
you via email or text (SMS) message when
the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm
system has been triggered. There are a num-
ber of reasons why your alarm may have been
triggered, one of which could be that your
vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the
details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance ser -
vice below. When activated, Theft Alarm No-
tification is automatically set to send you an
email at the email address you provide
should the alarm go off. You may also opt to
have a text message sent to your device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement im-
mediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle.
The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will ask
for the stolen vehicle report number issued
by local law enforcement. As long as your
vehicle has a SiriusXM Guardian subscrip-
tion and an operable network connection,
the agent may be able to locate the stolen
vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it. Y our vehicle must have an
operable network connection and must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian with an
active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows
you and your passengers to connect their
portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi
capabilities of your Uconnect system. Pur -
chasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the use of
an Internet-enabled portable device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3–month
trial period that includes 1GB of total data.
The trial can be activated any time within
the first year of new vehicle ownership.
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make note
of this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the main
Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check the box
to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
257
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi settings
menu, select the Hotspot Name from
the list of available networks and enter
the provided Password.
e. Open the web browser on your portable
device and enter the following web ad-
dress: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to
your existing one.
g. Select and purchase the desired sub-
scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot will
activate after a few minutes.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus-
tomer Care at: 866-595-1330.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM Guard-
ian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows you
to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your
engine or activate your horn and lights from
virtually anywhere. Y our vehicle must be
equipped with remote start, must have a
SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and must have
an operable network connection. Services can
only be used where coverage is available. Y ou
can download the App from Mopar Owner Con-
nect or from the App Store (iPhone) or Google
Play Store (Android). Visit UconnectPhone.com
to determine if your device is compatible. For
Uconnect Phone customer support and to de-
termine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature pro-
vides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Y ou can send a request to your vehicle
in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered
your vehicle with the key, the engine will
shut off automatically.
• Y ou can also send a command to turn-off
an engine that has been remote started.
• This remote function requires your ve-
hicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To utilize
this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login with your user name
and password.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian
Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the
“remote start” icon on your Uconnect App to
remotely start the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA
258
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at mopar.com and click on Edit Profile
to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —
This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock
the door on your vehicle, without the keys and
from virtually any distance. Y ou can send a
request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. Y ou will need your four digit SiriusXM
Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect
App to lock the doors, and press the “open lock”
icon to unlock the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at mopar.com and click on Edit Profile
to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. Y ou can
send a request to your vehicle in one of three
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care
on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. Y ou will need your four digit SiriusXM
Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at mopar.com and click on Edit Profile
to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Vehicle Finder
The V ehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you can't remember where it's
parked. Y ou can also sound the alarm and flash
the lights to make finding your vehicle even
easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “V ehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-
pears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
259
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile
App allows you to search for a destination on
your mobile device and then send the route to
your vehicle’s Uconnect Navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would like
to navigate to, or search through one of the
categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To V ehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle
by pressing the “Go Now” option on the
pop-up that appears on the touchscreen,
when the vehicle is started.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players or USB devices through your vehi-
cle's sound system. Press your Media button on
the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’ s sound sys-
tem, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify
the source and play through the vehicle
speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-
screen will change the mode to auxiliary de-
vice if the audio jack is connected, allowing
the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate the
AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may be
controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out in the front of
the console.
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB
cable into the USB Port. USB Memory sticks
with audio files can also be used. Audio from
the device can be played on the vehicles
sound system while providing metadata (art-
ist, track title, album, etc.) information on the
radio display.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port One
2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port Two
MULTIMEDIA
260
• When connected, the compatible USB device
can be controlled using the radio or Steering
Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next
or previous track, browse, and list the con-
tents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time,
the system may take several minutes to read
your music, depending on the number of files.
For example, the system will take approximately
five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on
the device. Also during the reading process, the
Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled.
This process is needed to ensure the full use of
your features and only happens the first time it
is connected. After the first time, the reading
process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new songs
are added to the playlist.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,
your Bluetooth-equipped device may also be
able to stream music to your vehicle's sound
system. Y our connected device must be
Bluetooth-compatible and paired with your
system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in-
structions). You can access the music from
your connected Bluetooth device by pressing
the Bluetooth
button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
261
Media Controls
Uconnect 4 Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
MULTIMEDIA
262
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
263
The controls are accessed by pressing the de-
sired button on the touchscreen and choosing
between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the ap-
propriate mode when something is first con-
nected or inserted into the system.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is de-
signed to give your family years of enjoyment.
You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray
Discs, listen to audio over the wireless head-
phones, or plug and play a variety of standard
video games or audio devices.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats:
Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on
cover.
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray
Disc Player . If equipped with a Blu-ray disc
player, the icon will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system
by pushing the power button on the remote
control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically,
the headphone transmitters turn on and play-
back begins.
RSE System Screen
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
MULTIMEDIA
264
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel
1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and head-
phones, refers to Screen 1 (driver's side) and
Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote Control and
Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger
side).
• The system can be controlled either by the
front seat occupants utilizing the touchscreen
radio or by the rear seat occupants using the
remote control.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment
System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
RSE System Remote Control Channel
Selectors
RSE System Headphone Channel
Selectors
265
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center
console.
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player
with the label facing as indicated on the
Blu-ray player. The radio automatically se-
lects the appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized and displays the menu screen,
the language screen, or starts playing the
first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver's
side rear passengers, ensure the Remote
Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for pas-
senger side rear passengers, ensure the Re-
mote Control and Headphone switch is on
Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the
“Media” button on the touchscreen, and then
press the “Disc” button. Press the “Play”
button, and then the “full screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces. The ve-
hicle must be stopped, and the gear selector
must be in the PARK position for vehicles with
automatic transmission.
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
MULTIMEDIA
266
Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted
when it is the active Screen/Channel being
controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access
controls for Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current igni-
tion cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute
rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control
functions.
Rear Media Control Screen
267
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
2/Channel 2. This button will be highlighted
when it is the active Screen/Channel being
controlled by the front user . If this button is not
highlighted, select button to access controls
for Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
6. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin au-
dio to the rear entertainment source cur-
rently shown on the rear media control
screen.
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen
Mode.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change source for the
active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on
the rear media control screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the rear media button on the
touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touch-
screen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s
side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s
side rear screen), and then press the source
key, and using the up and down arrows, high-
light disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the
side of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks)
on the side of each seat enable the monitor to
display video directly from a video camera, connect
video games for display on the screen, or play
music directly from an MP3 player.
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the standard
color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
MULTIMEDIA
268
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power
Inverter.
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray
system that announces a function prior to per-
forming the action. For further information refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual.
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen in the lower right area of the screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance”
button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Vol-
ume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
269
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5 — Navigate To Saved W ork Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
MULTIMEDIA
270
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory , if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen, press
the “Points of Interest” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Spell Name” or
“Search All” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” or “OK” button on the touch-
screen.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!”
button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking
your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find Ad-
dress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Using your touchscreens keyboard is not avail-
able while your vehicle is in motion. However,
you can also use V oice Commands to enter an
address while moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice
Recognition Quick Tips” in this section for fur-
ther information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav”
button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to
access the Navigation system and the Main
Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
You can add a Home location by either select-
ing “Spell City,” “Spell Street,” or “Select
Country.” Select County is automatically filled
out based on your state.
• Once you have entered your Home location,
select the “Save Home” button located on the
lower left-hand side of your touchscreen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new Home
location, press the “Nav” button on the touch-
screen, and in the “Where To” screen, press
“Edit Where To” and then press the “Home”
button on the touchscreen. Under the Manage
screen press the “Reset Location” button. A
confirmation screen will appear asking if you
“Are you sure you want to reset this location?”
Press “Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a
new Home location by following the previous
instructions.
271
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system.
From the Main Navigation menu, press the
“Home” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
MULTIMEDIA
272
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could
appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen
to return to the Main Navigation menu.
•
Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the extra stop. When
another location has been selected, you can
choose to cancel your previous route, add as the
first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
•
To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
•
Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device may not calculate
a detour. For more information, see your
Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By en-
hancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information,
you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time
along your route. Since the service is integrated
with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM
Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the fastest
route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, acci-
dents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, in-
cluding police and emergency services, cam-
eras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route
and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre-
mium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM
Travel Link brings a wealth of useful information
into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station of
your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres
and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as
well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national
weather information from radar maps to cur -
rent and 5-day forecast.
273
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely inte-
grated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you
start your vehicle, Travel Link information ar -
rives and updates in the background. Y ou can
access the information whenever you like, with
no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription in-
cluded with your vehicle purchase.
MULTIMEDIA
274
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (re-
quires Bluetooth MAP profile)
275
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (re-
quires Bluetooth MAP profile)
MULTIMEDIA
276
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls
using their voice or by using the buttons on the
touchscreen (see V oice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible
through Bluetooth technology — the global
standard that enables different electronic de-
vices to connect to each other wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Pro-
file, V ersion 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible
with the Uconnect system, however some mo-
bile phones/devices may not be equipped with
all of the required features to utilize all of the
Uconnect system features.
For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian residents visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French).
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-
lishing a wireless connection between a cellular
phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
•
To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first
must determine if your mobile phone and soft-
ware are compatible with the Uconnect system.
Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the
vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 4:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
•
Uconnect Phone will display an “In prog-
ress” screen while the system is connecting.
Uconnect 4
277
Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Pairing.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
•
Uconnect Phone will display an “In prog-
ress” screen while the system is connecting.
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will be-
gin to search for Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone, ac-
cept the connection request from Uconnect
Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
MULTIMEDIA
278
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite mobile
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile
phone the highest priority. This mobile phone
will take precedence over other paired mobile
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering
the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will be-
gin to search for Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect”.
• Y ou may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook, check
“Do Not Ask Again” to automatically
download the phonebook. This is so you
can make calls by saying the name of
your contact.
Uconnect Device
279
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth
pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite mobile
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile
phone the highest priority . This mobile phone
will take precedence over other paired mobile
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering
the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
NOTE:
Software updates, either on your phone or
Uconnect system, may interfere with the
Bluetooth connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However , first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for addi-
tional information on mobile phone pairing and
for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen to mute and unmute the
call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer”
button on the Phone main screen to transfer
an on-going call between handset and vehicle.
Pairing Request
MULTIMEDIA
280
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if this
feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook
contacts are updated each time that the phone
is connected. If your phone book entries do not
appear, check the settings on your phone. Some
phones require you to enable this feature manu-
ally.
•
Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing can
only be done on your phone. To browse, press the
“Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the
“Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe
vs. Call John) will result in greater system
accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for faster
results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for ex-
ample.
• If you are listening to available voice com-
mand options, you do not have to listen to the
entire list. When you hear the command that
you need, push the
button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your
command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
, then say a command. For example,
"Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME rotary knob to adjust
the volume to a comfortable level while the
Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect VR button
(if active) on the steering wheel and say
"help." Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button
(if active) or the VR button (if active)
and say "cancel" to cancel the help session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now , I will get back to you
shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
281
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Message
Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can
announce a new incoming text message and read it
to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
•
A pop up will appear asking you to accept
a request for permission to connect to
your messages. Select “Don’t ask again”
and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during the
current ignition cycle will be deleted from the
Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to
the OFF position.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
MULTIMEDIA
282
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your
Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted
device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings
(Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone.
Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or
cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot).
Your mobile phone can still be connected
manually. Close all applications that may be
operating (refer to mobile phone manufactur-
er’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wire-
lessly Connecting) Y our Mobile Phone To The
Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see your
mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’ s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• V erify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile
phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your mo-
bile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect
4C/4C NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers
per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4
system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carri-
ers do not support conference calling. Refer to
your mobile phone user’s manual for further
information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-
Free Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
283
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
V oice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using V oice Recognition:
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and pas-
senger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is positioned on the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the V oice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your V oice Command.
5. Y ou can interrupt the help message or sys-
tem prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a V oice Command from
current category.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
MULTIMEDIA
284
Basic Voice Commands
The basic V oice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
•“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Com-
mands
•“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’ s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear . (Subscription or included SiriusXM Sat-
ellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the
VR button
and say, “Help.” The system
provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A
Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio,
Media, or Climate Functions. For 8.4–
inch System Only: Push To Begin Naviga-
tion Function
3 — Push To End Call
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
285
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
V oice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
•“Change source to Bluetooth”
•“Change source to AUX”
•“Change source to USB”
•“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great-
est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Y our Voice Command must match ex-
actly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook but-
ton is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
tions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
•“Call John Smith”
•“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
•“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-
ber)”
•“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP: When providing a V oice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work.”
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
MULTIMEDIA
286
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button
and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes-
sages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traf-
fic.
See you later .
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Y our mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only . To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four
simple steps:
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired V ehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
287
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri
Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text
message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures
hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is
equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee
shop.”
Uconnect 4 Climate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Navigation
MULTIMEDIA
288
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If
Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including
SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will
NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required
to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian
services in the next section of this guide. To
register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps
button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NA V touch-
screen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the conti-
nental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and
Canada. Services can only be used where cov-
erage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
V ehicle Finder
Stolen V ehicle Assistance
Remote V ehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
V ehicle Health Reports**
V ehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guard-
ian in your vehicle, you must activate your
SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
•
U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/
guardian.
•
Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on top
of your vehicle’ s maintenance needs if you are
registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Y our vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it
detects issues with its key systems that need
your attention. For further information, refer to
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
289
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and sending a destination from your
phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian services, download the Uconnect
App to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin
using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote V e-
hicle Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle Finder
and Send & Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the 5-day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite
of services that brings a wealth of information
right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for 4C system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Show fuel prices”
•“Show 5-day weather forecast”
•“Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with V oice
Command.
Mobile App
SiriusXM Travel Link
MULTIMEDIA
290
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text mes-
sages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is de-
signed to keep your eyes on the road and your
hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages and many other
useful requests.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now , I will get back to you
shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
291
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’ s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’ s voice recogni-
tion system, and use your smartphone’ s data
plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android
5.0 (Lollipop), or higher , to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided USB
cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that
replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu
bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel, or press and
hold the “Microphone” icon within Android
Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recog-
nizes natural voice commands, to use a list of
your smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple Car -
Play features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone and a number
of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your iPhone 5, or higher , to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main
menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay . Press and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA
292
press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natu-
ral voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’ s
features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility . Data plan rates apply. V e-
hicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of
use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer -
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
293
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www .siriusxm.com/
guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www .siriusxm.ca/
guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
MULTIMEDIA
294
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE............296
FCA US LLC Customer Center........296
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .....296
In Mexico Contact ..............296
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . .296
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).........297
Service Contract ...............297
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........298
In The 50 United States And W ashington,
D.C. ......................298
In Canada ...................298
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........298
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
295
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are
vitally interested in your satisfaction. W e want
you to be happy with our products and services.
W arranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. W e strongly recommend that you take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer . They know
your vehicle the best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner .
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer . They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's cus-
tomer center should include the following infor -
mation:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• V ehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• V ehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-
9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
296
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in
the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for V oice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New V ehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer's service contract, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the
service contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's
service contract. It is not responsible for any
service contract other than the manufacturer's
service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's service
contract, and you require service after the
manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited W arranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
W e appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the own-
ership experience. Y ou will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other re-
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
tive harm.
297
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and rem-
edy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, an authorized dealer or
FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the V e-
hicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Av-
enue, SE., W est Building, W ashington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www .safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor V ehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
W arranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Dodge Contact Us page at
www.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Com-
partment Material” from the left menu. You
can also purchase a copy by calling
1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
•
Replacement User Guide kits or , if you prefer ,
additional printed copies of the Owner's Manual,
W arranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be pur-
chased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or
by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover orders
are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the Chrysler,
Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SR T websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/
Service Manuals”. Then select your desired
model year and vehicle from the drop down
lists.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
298
Accessories ..................231
Mopar ...................231
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)...................153
Off..................153, 155
On ..................153, 155
Adding Fuel ..................162
Additives, Fuel ................164
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation .............105
Air Bag W arning Light ..........103
Driver Knee Air Bag ...........106
Enhanced Accident Response . .110, 196
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......196
If Deployment Occurs ..........109
Knee Impact Bolsters ..........106
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . .111
Maintenance ...............111
Redundant Air Bag W arning Light . . .104
Side Air Bags ...............106
Transporting Pets .............128
Air Bag Light............72, 103, 129
Air Conditioning
Rear .....................47
Air Conditioning Filter .............52
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......51
Air Conditioning System ............50
Air Pressure
Tires ....................215
Alarm
Arm The System ..............19
Disarm The System ............20
Security Alarm ...............75
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...............19
All Wheel Drive (A WD) ............145
Android Auto ...........239, 245, 292
Apps ....................248
Communication ..............248
Maps ....................247
Music ...................248
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)......227, 228
Anti-Lock W arning Light............77
Apple CarPlay ..........240,
249, 292
Apps ....................251
Maps ....................250
Music ...................250
Phone ...................250
Arming System
Security Alarm ...............19
Audio Jack...................260
Auto Down Power Windows ..........53
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..........35
Automatic Headlights .............37
Automatic High Beams ............37
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ....50
Automatic Transmission ...........141
Adding Fluid ...............231
Fluid Type ..............229, 231
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .61
Auxiliary Power Outlet .............61
Axle Fluid ...................229
Axle Lubrication ...............231
Back-Up ....................161
Back-Up Camera ...............161
Battery......................73
Charging System Light ..........73
Belts, Seat...................129
Blind Spot Monitoring .............84
B-Pillar Location ...............212
Brake Fluid ...............229, 231
Brake System
Fluid Check ................231
W arning Light ................72
INDEX
299
Brake/Transmission Interlock ........140
Bulb Replacement ..............174
Bulbs, Light ..................131
Camera ....................161
Capacities, Fluid ............227, 228
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................205
Carbon Monoxide W arning..........129
Changing A Flat Tire .............208
Chart, Tire Sizing ...............209
Checking Your V ehicle For Safety ......128
Checks, Safety ................128
Child Restraint ................112
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...............114
Child Seat Installation ..........125
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .123
Infant And Child Restraints .......113
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . .119
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ..................116
Older Children And Child Restraints . .114
Seating Positions .............115
Cleaning
Wheels ...................222
Climate Control .................41
Automatic ..................41
Compact Spare Tire .............220
Contract, Service ...............297
Cooling System
Cooling Capacity ..........227, 228
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ..........227, 228, 230
Cruise Light ................79, 80
Customer Assistance .............296
Customer Programmable Features .....251
Cybersecurity .................235
Daytime Running Lights............36
Defroster, Windshield ............129
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........81
Disable V ehicle Towing............193
Disturb .................281, 291
Door Ajar ..................73,
74
Door Ajar Light...............73, 74
Doors ......................20
Drag And Drop Menu .........237, 243
Drive Modes ..................143
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............24
DVD Player (Video Entertainment
System)...................264
Economy (Fuel) Mode ............140
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . .61
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . .145
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .151
Electronic Throttle Control W arning Light . .73
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing V ehicle When Stuck ......192
Hazard W arning Flasher .........174
Jacking ...............180, 208
Jump Starting ...............188
Tow Hooks .................196
Engine..................205, 207
Break-In Recommendations .......138
Compartment ........205, 206, 207
Compartment Identification . . .205, 206
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........230
Exhaust Gas Caution ...........129
Fuel Requirements ............227
Jump Starting ...............188
Oil...............227, 228, 230
Oil Filler Cap ...............205
Oil Selection ............227, 228
Overheating ................190
Starting ..................135
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature................110, 196
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............129
Exhaust System................129
INDEX
300
Exterior Lights ...........35, 131, 174
Filters
Air Conditioning ..............52
Engine Oil .................230
Flashers ....................174
Hazard W arning ..............174
Turn Signals .............79, 131
Fluid, Brake ..................231
Fluid Capacities ............227, 228
Fluid Leaks ..................131
Fluids And Lubricants......228, 229, 230
Fold-Flat Seats .................24
Folding Rear Seat ...............29
Forward Collision W arning...........86
Four -W ay Hazard Flasher ..........174
Freeing A Stuck V ehicle ...........192
Front And Rear ParkSense System .....159
Fuel
Additives ..................164
Economy Mode ..............140
Materials Added .............164
Octane Rating ...............230
Requirements ...............227
Specifications ...........228, 230
Tank Capacity ............227, 228
Fueling.....................162
Fuses......................176
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .......58
General Information .............252
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect .................275
Hazard W arning Flasher ...........174
Headlights
Automatic ..................37
On With Wipers ...............37
Head Restraints ................30
Heated Mirrors .................35
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......58
Hood Prop....................56
Hood Release ..................56
Ignition .....................16
Key
Fob Battery Low Or Dead .......16
Key Fob Not Detected ...........16
Keyless Ignition ..............16
Keyless Push Button ............16
Push Button Ignition ............16
Switch ....................16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...........18
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................79
Display .................68, 70
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ......38
Introduction ...................1
In V ehicle Help
V ehicle User Guide .............13
Inverter
Power ....................64
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions . .183
Jacking Instructions .............184
Jack Location .................181
Jack Operation .............184, 208
Jump Starting .................188
KeyFob.....................14
Arm The System ..............19
Disarm The System ............20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....18
Keyless Enter -N-Go
Passive Entry ................20
Passive Entry Programming ........20
Keys .......................14
Replacement ..............15, 18
Sentry (Immobilizer) ............18
Lane Change Assist ..............38
LaneSense...................161
301
Lap/Shoulder Belts...............95
Latches ....................131
Hood .....................56
Leaks, Fluid ..................131
Life Of Tires ..................218
Liftgate .....................57
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ........40
Light Bulbs ..................131
Lights .....................131
AirBag.............72, 103, 129
Automatic Headlights ...........37
Brake W arning ...............72
Bulb Replacement ............174
Cruise ..................79, 80
Daytime Running ..............36
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........35
Engine Temperature W arning .......74
Exterior ..................131
Hazard W arning Flasher .........174
Headlights On With Wipers ........37
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . .75
Park .....................79
Seat Belt Reminder ............71
Security Alarm ...............75
Service ...................174
Turn Signals ...........35, 79, 131
W arning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ..............74, 79
Loading V ehicle
Tires ....................212
Lug Nuts....................226
Maintenance Schedule ........198, 200
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ...............75
Manual, Service................298
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .......24
Memory Seat ..................24
Memory Seats And Radio ...........24
Mirrors......................35
Automatic Dimming ............35
Heated ...................35
Outside ...................35
Rearview ..................35
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........88
Mopar Accessories ..............231
Multi-Function
Control Lever .........35
Navigation ...................269
New V ehicle Break-In Period ........138
Occupant Restraints ..............92
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......230
Oil Change Indicator ..............69
Reset ....................69
Oil, Engine ..................230
Capacity ...............227, 228
Filter ....................230
Pressure W arning Light ..........74
Recommendation .........227, 228
Viscosity ...............227, 228
Oil Pressure Light ...............74
Onboard Diagnostic System..........81
Operating Precautions .............81
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...........35
Overheating, Engine .............190
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual).....298
ParkSense
Front And Rear ..............159
ParkSense System ..............159
ParkSense System, Rear...........158
Passive Entry ..................20
Personalized Main Menu .......237, 243
Pets ......................128
Phone
Pairing ...................277
Phonebook ..................281
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) .......275
Phone (Uconnect) ..............275
INDEX
302
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . .212
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) .......176
Inverter ...................64
Liftgate ...................57
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ....61
Steering ..................229
Sunroof ...................54
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .....34
Windows ...................52
Pregnant W omen And Seat Belts .......98
Preparation For Jacking ...........183
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................98
Radial Ply Tires ................216
Radio
Presets ...............238, 244
Radio Frequency
General Information ............15
General Information ..........17, 19
General Information ............23
Radio Operation ............236, 242
Radio Screens .............236, 242
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........39
Rear Air Conditioning .............47
Rear Camera .................161
Rear Cross Path ................84
Rear ParkSense System ........158, 161
Rear Wiper/Washer ...............40
Recreational Towing .............167
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ................169
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ................170
Release, Hood .................56
Reminder, Seat Belt ..............94
Remote Keyless Entry .............14
Arm The Alarm ...............19
Disarm The Alarm .............20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....18
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..........17
Replacement Bulbs .............174
Replacement Keys ............15, 18
Replacement Tires ..............218
Reporting Safety Defects ..........298
Restraints, Child ...............112
Restraints,
Head ................30
Roll Over W arning ................2
Safety Checks Inside V ehicle ........129
Safety Checks Outside V ehicle .......131
Safety Defects, Reporting ..........298
Safety, Exhaust Gas .............129
Safety Information, Tire ...........208
Safety Tips...................128
Schedule, Maintenance ........198, 200
Seat Belt Reminder ..............71
Seat Belts.................93, 129
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .........97
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .97
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ..................97
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . .99
Child Restraints ..............112
Energy Management Feature .......99
Extender ...................98
Front Seat .............93, 95, 96
Inspection .................129
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .......96
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............95
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .......97
Operating Instructions ...........96
Pregnant W omen ..............98
Pretensioners ................98
Rear Seat ..................95
Reminder ..................94
Seat Belt Extender .............98
Seat Belt Pretensioner ...........98
Untwisting Procedure ...........97
303
Seats ....................24, 27
Adjustment .................24
Easy Entry ..................26
Heated ...................27
Memory ...................24
Rear Folding ..............24, 29
Tilting ....................24
V ented ....................28
V entilated ..................28
Security Alarm ...............19, 75
Arm The System ..............19
Disarm The System ............20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . .228, 230
Sentry Key
Key Programming .............18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...........18
Sentry Key Replacement .........15, 18
Service Assistance ..............296
Service Contract ...............297
Service Manuals ...............298
Shifting ....................139
Automatic Transmission ......139, 141
Shoulder Belts .................95
Side View Mirror Adjustment .........35
Signals, Turn ...............79, 131
Siri .......................291
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & W eather .............273
Sirius Travel Link ...............273
SiriusXM Guardian ..............253
Account ..................253
App.....................254
In V ehicle Features ............255
Maintaining Your Account ........255
Registration ................254
Remote Features .............258
Renewing Subscriptions .........255
Send&Go.................260
V ehicle Finder ...............259
V ehicle Health Alert ...........289
Snow Tires ...................220
Spare Tires.........181,
220, 221, 222
Spark Plugs ...........228, 229, 230
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..............230
Oil .....................230
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............152, 153
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .........154
Cancel ...................153
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ......156
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ........156
Resume ..................153
Set .....................152
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......151
Starting ....................135
Button ....................16
Starting And Operating............135
Starting Procedures .............135
Steering .....................34
Tilt Column .................34
Wheel, Heated ...............35
Wheel, Tilt ..................34
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .......252
Storage, V ehicle ................51
Sun Roof ....................54
Telescoping Steering Column .........34
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)....50
Text Messages.................282
Tilt Steering Column ..............34
Tips.......................252
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . .212
Tire Markings .................208
Tires ............131, 215, 220, 223
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...........218
Air Pressure ................215
Changing ...........180, 188, 208
Compact Spare ..............220
Flat Changing ...............188
INDEX
304
General Information ........215, 220
High Speed ................216
Inflation Pressure .............215
Jacking ...................208
Life Of Tires ................218
Load Capacity ...............212
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .76, 88
Quality Grading ..............223
Radial ...................216
Replacement ............188, 218
Safety ................208, 215
Sizes ....................209
Snow Tires .................220
Spare Tires .......181, 220, 221, 222
Spinning ..................217
Tread W ear Indicators ..........218
Wheel Mounting .............188
Wheel Nut Torque ............226
Tire Safety Information............208
To Open Hood..................56
Tow Hooks, Emergency............196
Towing ..................165, 193
Disabled V ehicle .............193
Guide ................165, 167
Recreational ................167
W eight ................165, 167
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........167
Trailer Towing .................165
Trailer Towing Guide ..........165, 167
Trailer W eight ..............165, 167
Transfer Case
Electronically Shifted ..........145
Fluid ....................229
Transmission .................141
Automatic .................141
Fluid ....................229
Shifting ..................139
T
ransporting Pets ...............128
Tread W ear Indicators ............218
Turn Signals...................79
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display ...................242
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display ......236
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call ...........275
Receiving A Call .............275
Uconnect Phone ...............275
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ....20
Passive Entry Programming ........20
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .........223
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .......97
USB......................260
V ehicle Loading ................212
V ehicle Security Alarm.............19
V ehicle Storage .................51
V ehicle User Guide
In V ehicle Help ...............13
V oice Command ............281, 284
Commands ................280
V oice Recognition
System (VR)..........280, 281, 284
W arning Flasher, Hazard ...........174
W arning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................76
W arnings, Roll Over ...............2
W ashers, W indshield ..............38
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........222
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .........222
Wind Buffeting .................54
Window Fogging ................51
305
307
308
309
310
311
312
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Dodge
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions. However, it
is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may
apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help
personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
DRIVING AND
ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most
frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a
collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the
safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in a collision and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as
cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle. Some
states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer
2018
DURANGO
USER
GUIDE
INCLUDES SRT
Whether it’s providing information about specific
product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your
Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your
make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers
tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this
information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review
and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular
Topics” area of the www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the
instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of
your vehicle.
©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
18WD-926-AA
DURANGO
SIXTH EDITION
USER GUIDE
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY
OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, MEDIA AND WARRANTY
BOOKLET BY VISITING:
WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNERS-MANUAL.HTML
(U.S. RESIDENTS);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
(CANADIAN RESIDENTS).
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
